JP2020062534A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: As a privilege game to be executed by privilege game execution means, one kind is selected from a plurality of predetermined privilege game kinds by kind selection means. As a game state after execution of the privilege game is over, a first game state and a second game state advantageous to a player in comparison with the first game state are set by game state setting means. When the privilege game is executed, on the basis of the kind of the executed privilege game, in setting by the game state setting means executed after that, a first state that a second game state is set consecutively over a first frequency of privilege games and a second state that the second game state is set consecutively for a second frequency higher than the first frequency can be set by state setting means. Thus, it is possible to enhance a player's interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an advantageous winning state is given to the player when the lottery result executed based on the starting winning is a win. Among such conventional type gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that is provided with a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player after winning, as a privilege for winning. As a privilege to be won, there is a bonus that is given to the player after the win. In the probability variation state, the lottery probability of winning is higher than usual, so that the winning is likely to continue for a short period. Therefore, by making the player expect that the winning and the probability change state are repeated, the player's interest is improved.

JP, 2003-320110, A

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the probability variation state set after the hit is only once, and it is unclear whether the probability variation state is set after the hit. Therefore, it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player in playing the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a player based on a determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a determination condition and a specific determination result by the determination means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to, and a type selecting means for selecting one type from a plurality of predetermined types of the privilege game as the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, As a game state after the execution of the privilege game is finished, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the first game state, and When the privilege game is executed, based on the type of the privilege game executed, the setting is performed by the game state setting means to be executed thereafter, and the game is continuously performed for the first number of times of the privilege game. Second It is provided with a state setting means capable of setting at least a first state in which a game state is set and a second state in which the second game state is continuously set a second number of times larger than the first number of times. .

  The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the state setting means compares the second game state with the game state setting means based on the type of the privilege game executed. It is possible to set a third state in which the first game state is easily set.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when the first state or the second state is set, the number of times corresponding to the set state is set. An avoiding means is provided for avoiding setting the first gaming state until the second gaming state is continuously set.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, in which a game ball is allowed to enter during execution of the privilege game, and a variable ball entering means. A first ball-entering area, which is arranged inside the variable ball-entering means, in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means can enter, a second ball-entering area different from the first ball-entering area, and the variable ball-entering A distribution means that is variable between a first distribution state in which the game balls that have entered the means are distributed to the first entry area and a second distribution state that is distributed in the second entry area, and the distribution pattern of the distribution means. As an example, a distribution pattern determining means for determining one distribution pattern from a plurality of predetermined distribution patterns, and the distribution means for varying the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determining means. Distribution control means for controlling, and the distribution pattern determination means, when compared with the first game state, when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, to the first entry area It is easy to determine a distribution pattern in which the game ball is easy to enter, and the game state setting means sets the second game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry area. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the determination means executes a predetermined determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the determination means gives a specific determination result, which is advantageous for the player. The game is executed by the privilege game executing means. As the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type is selected by the type selecting means from a plurality of predetermined types of privilege games. As the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, the first game state and the second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the first game state are set by the game state setting means. When the privilege game is executed, based on the type of the privilege game executed, the second state is continuously set for the first number of privilege games by the setting by the game state setting means executed thereafter. The state setting means can set the first state in which the state is set and the second state in which the second game state is set continuously for the second number of times larger than the first number.

  As a result, it is possible to expect the second game state a plurality of times by changing to the first state or the second state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, based on the type of the privilege game executed, the gaming state setting means compares the first gaming state with the second gaming state. Since the third state in which the game state is easily set is set by the state setting means, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous because only the first state or the second state is set. There is.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, when the first state or the second state is set, the set state is set. Since the setting of the first game state is avoided by the avoiding means until the corresponding number of times of the second game state is continuously set, in the case where the first state or the second state is set. , There is an effect that it is possible to surely set the corresponding number of times of the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are arranged inside the variable ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the bonus game. The distribution means is variable between a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are allocated to the first entrance area and a second allocation state in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area. As a distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined from the plurality of predetermined distribution patterns by the distribution pattern determination means, and the distribution means is varied according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means. It is controlled by the control means. Compared to the first game state, when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, the distribution pattern determining means is more likely to determine the distribution pattern in which the game balls are likely to enter the first ball entry area. The second game state is set by the game state setting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry area.

  As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed according to the distribution pattern set in the distribution means, so that the distribution pattern to be set can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a second variable winning device. (A) is a front perspective view of a distribution rotator, and (b) is a sectional view of a second variable winning device. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) shows the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first embodiment in the first embodiment. It is the mimetic diagram which showed typically correspondence relation between the hit classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol, (c) shows typically the correspondence relation between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the variation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the variation pattern table for big hits typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the rotating body pattern table typically. It is a timing chart showing the correspondence between the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening and the movement of the guide member, which is set according to the jackpot type. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the state of a specific winning a prize mouth, a guide member, and a distribution rotator when it became the big hit A. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the state of a specific winning a prize mouth, a guide member, and a distribution rotator when it became the big hit B. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the state of a specific winning a prize mouth, a guide member, and a distribution rotator when it became the jackpot C. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the state of a specific winning a prize mouth, a guide member, and a distribution rotator when it became the big hit D. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the back surface type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the low certainty time selection table which comprises the back surface type selection table. is there. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the probability variation time selection table which comprises a back surface type selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the back image change processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 7 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a front perspective view of a distribution rotor according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the distribution rotor according to the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a big hit in 2nd Embodiment, and arrangement | positioning of distribution rotor. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of continuous probability change states and the number of continuous probability change states. It is the figure which showed the time change of the opening pattern of the 2nd specific winning opening set according to the jackpot type. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the probability change time selection table which comprises the back surface type selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side where the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect contents of super reach.

  The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, the "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", " There are 5 stages, "Sky Stage" and "Island Stage". Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect that are performed in association with the entrance (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, which will be described later, are themes given to the respective stages. It is designed to be tailored to. Whether or not to change the stage is drawn at the start of the variable effect. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach effect is started, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for the effect mode of the super reach during normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. To be The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (second entrance). Ordinary symbols (second symbol) are drawn by lot when passing through the mouth 67. In the lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 1) performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the jackpot type is also determined. In addition, even in the special symbol lottery (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed for the entry into the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit by the same determination method as the lottery of the special symbol 1 A decision is made. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2, a big hit type different from the lottery of the special symbol 1 is determined (see FIG. 10 (b)). When the special symbol jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a (the second specific winning opening 650a only in the 15th round only) that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapse). Or until 10 balls are won), and the opening is repeated 15 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of winning balls than normal is paid out. As the jackpot type of special symbols, four types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot D" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as a value added after the jackpot finishes, on a game according to these jackpot types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 60 seconds) elapses, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is up to 4 times for each entrance. It is reserved until, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. , The variable display according to the lottery is started. The first specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed in the special gaming state in the 1st to 14th rounds, is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64. Therefore, during the 1st to 14th rounds of the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it win the first specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It becomes easy. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is started. It

  As described above, four types of "big hit A" to "big hit D" are provided as special jackpot types. In any of the cases of “big hit A” to “big hit D”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15R big hit), and then the added value after the big hit ends is given. More specifically, in the jackpot (special game state), the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a is a probability variation entry opening 671 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 (FIG. 5 (b)). By referencing), the state changes to the special symbol probability change state. That is, as an added value after the jackpot, until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the change of the special symbol), and normally. The design shifts to a time saving state. On the other hand, when the ball does not enter the certainty variation ball entrance 671 by the time the jackpot (special game state) ends, no additional value is given after the jackpot ends. That is, the state shifts to a normal state (a low probability state of the special symbol, and a normal state of the normal symbol).

  "High probability state of the special symbol" means a state where the jackpot probability of the special symbol has increased, a so-called special variation state of the special symbol (during the variation of the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (15R jackpot) It is a game state that is easy to play. On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). Further, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (during the time saving of the ordinary symbol) means that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the ball is easy to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal symbol" is called "normal state of normal symbol", this is the normal state where the probability of hitting a normal symbol is normal (that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during the time saving). Indicates that.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state (that is, when the ball enters the probability variation entrance ball 671 during the big hit), the special symbol is drawn. Although it is configured that the probability change state of the special symbol continues until the end of 100 times, it is not limited to this and the number of times may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, from the end of the special game state until the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times, the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state) is given, and after the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times May be configured to be set to a low probability state of a special symbol. Further, it is not necessary to limit the number of times that the special symbol is in the probability changing state, and for example, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol is configured to be in a time saving state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot is finished, but the time saving period of the ordinary symbol is not limited to 100 times, and is arbitrary. May be specified.

  The first entrance 64 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80. On the other hand, the second entrance 640 is arranged on the right side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 and a second entrance A switch (not shown) is turned on, a lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first entrance opening switch or the second entrance opening switch, and a display according to the result of the drawing It is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. . In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (15 round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for the predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 14 times (14 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a, and a large opening solenoid (for opening / closing the front side around the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state.

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided below the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally elongated rectangular second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion of an upper surface thereof. It is provided. This 2nd specific winning a prize mouth 650a is opened and closed in the 15th round of the big hit with the opening pattern which is decided beforehand corresponding to the big hit type (see FIG. 13).

  Inside the second variable winning device 650, a plurality of ball entrances through which balls can enter are provided. Specifically, by entering the ball during the jackpot, the probability variation ball entrance 671 to which the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is finished, and the entered ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Yes (the probability that the special symbol is not changed even if the ball enters) is normally provided. The ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 enters (is distributed to) one of these three entrances (probably variable entrance 671, normal entrances 672, 673). Is discharged to. That is, all the balls that have not entered the probability variation entrance 671 enter the normal entrance 672 or 673 and are discharged to the outside. If the ball entered at least once in the probability variation entrance ball 671 in 1 jackpot, after the jackpot, the probability of the special symbol is changed until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol Is given. On the other hand, in the case of not having entered the probability variation entrance ball 671 even once in one jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot is completed (shifts to the normal state).

  A configuration for distributing the balls by the second variable winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the second variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the second variable winning device 650 is configured in the shape of a box having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a space inside. A second specific winning port 650a is provided on the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 as an opening communicating with the internal space of the second variable winning device 650. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally closed by a closing plate 650b. The closing plate 650b is driven by a solenoid and projects toward the front side in the front view to close the second specific winning port 650a, and when retracted into the back side in the front view, the second specific winning port 650a. It is configured so that it can be changed to an immersion position that opens.

  When the closing plate 650b is arranged at the projecting position, the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 and the closing plate 650b are smoothly communicated with each other, so that the ball reaching the right side of the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 is in front. It can be made to flow to the left direction. On the other hand, when the closing plate 650b is placed in the immersive position, the second specific winning port 650a is in an open state, so that the ball that has reached the upper right side of the second variable winning device 650 is the second specific winning port 650a. Can be made to flow into the inside of the second variable winning device 650.

  Inside the second variable winning device 650, downstream of the second specific winning port 650a, a distribution component 651 for distributing the sphere to either the normal channel 652 or the probability variation channel 653 is provided. . The distribution component 651 can be switched between a projecting state in which the guiding member 651a projects leftward in front view and a projecting state in which the guiding member 651a is recessed inside the distribution compound 651. When the distribution combination object 651 is in the immersive state, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can be made to flow down to the normal flow path 652 arranged immediately below the second specific winning opening 650a. . On the other hand, when the distribution component 651 is in the protruding state, the guide member 651a closes the upper surface side of the normal flow path 652, so that the ball entering the second specific winning port 650a flows down to the normal flow path 652. Can not be. In the projecting state, the guide member 651a is inclined downward to the lower left when viewed from the front, so the ball that has entered the second specific winning port 650a rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 651a and is viewed from the front. It flows down to the probability variation channel 653 provided on the left side. The sphere that has flowed down the probability variation channel 653 enters the probability variation inlet port 671 downstream thereof. Therefore, since the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is over, the player can be pleased.

  The distribution accessory 652 is kept in an immersive state in a normal time (a state other than a big hit). In addition, when it becomes a big hit, it is set to the protruding state 2 seconds after the start of the 15th round. This protruding state is maintained until the end of the 15th round, and when the 15th round is completed, the immersive state is set again. That is, if the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning port 650a after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round, the projecting member 651a guides the ball to the probability variation channel 653. By entering the ball into the probability variation ball opening 671, it is possible to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Therefore, in the 15th round, it is possible to make a big-hit game while paying attention to whether or not the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a after 2 seconds or more has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming a monotonous game just to obtain a prize ball, and to pay attention to the timing at which the ball enters the second specific winning port 650a, so that the jackpot game is monotonous. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Downstream of the normal flow path 652, a distribution rotator 661 for allocating the sphere to either the probability variation entrance 672 or the normal entrance 672 or 673 is arranged. The distribution rotator 661 is configured to be able to rotate clockwise with the shaft 661e as a rotation axis. The distribution rotator 661 is provided with four openings into which spheres flowing down the normal flow path 652 can enter. Of the four openings, the balls that have entered the normal distribution unit 661a and the normal distribution unit 661b are distributed to either the normal entrance port 672 or the normal entrance port 673. On the other hand, of the four openings, the probability variation distribution portion 661c and the probability variation distribution portion 661d cause the entered ball to flow down to the back surface side flow passage 654 provided on the back surface side of the distribution rotation body 661. As a result, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the certainty variation ball inlet 671 arranged downstream of the back surface side channel 654.

  Next, details of the distribution rotator 661 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a front perspective view of the distribution rotator 661. As shown in FIG. 5A, the distribution rotator 661 has a substantially columnar shape and is rotatable about a shaft 661e as a rotation axis. The shaft 661e is connected to a motor (not shown), and the operation of the motor is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. More specifically, in the 15th round of the jackpot, the MPU 201 sets a rotating operation having a different operation pattern for each jackpot type. The operation pattern for each jackpot type is defined in advance in the rotating body pattern table 202e (see FIG. 12) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the distribution rotator 661 is provided with four distribution units (openings), which are the normal distribution units 661a and 661b and the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d. Of these, the normal distribution units 661a and 661b communicate with each other. A back wall 661f is provided on the back side of the communicating portion to prevent the ball from coming off to the back side of the distribution rotator 661. As a result, the ball that has entered the one opening can be surely rolled on the inclined surface 661g and discharged from the other opening. The discharged balls are distributed to either the normal ball entrance 672 or the normal ball entrance 673 depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 as described above.

  On the other hand, unlike the normal distribution units 661a and 661b, the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d penetrate to the rear surface side of the distribution rotating body 661. Therefore, the entered ball can be advanced to the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661. The sphere that has traveled to the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661 flows down through the rear surface flow path 654 provided on the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661 and enters the positive variation ball opening 671. Therefore, if the sphere can reach the distribution rotator 661 with one of the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d arranged on the upper side of the distribution rotator 661, the special symbol will be drawn after the jackpot is over. Transition to the probable state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 650 when viewed from the front. In this example, the case where the normal distribution unit 661b of the distribution rotator 661 is at the rotation position arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 is shown. This rotation position is the initial arrangement of the distribution rotator 661, and is set to the initial arrangement each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed. When the sphere flows down the normal flow path 652 at this rotational position, the sphere enters the normal distribution unit 661b. Then, the spheres are discharged from the normal distribution unit 661a via the inclined surface 661g and proceed to the left channel 655 provided on the left side in front view with respect to the distribution rotating body 661. The ball that has proceeded to the left channel 655 enters a normal ball inlet 672 provided on the downstream side thereof and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the rotation position in FIG. 5B, the normal distribution unit 661 a is set to the rotation position arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the normal flow path 652 enters the normal distribution unit 661a. The presence of the back wall 661f hinders (limits) the movement of the ball entering the normal distribution unit 661a toward the rear side of the distribution rotating body 661, and therefore the normal distribution is performed via the inclined surface 661g. It is discharged from the dividing portion 661b. In a state in which the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the rotation position in FIG. 5B, the normal distribution unit 661b is arranged on the right side of the distribution rotator 661 when viewed from the front, and thus the sphere moves It is discharged to the left side of the minute rotating body 661. That is, the ball travels through the right channel 656 provided on the right side of the distribution rotor 661 and enters the normal ball entrance 673.

  When the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise from the rotation position in FIG. 5B, the probability variation distribution unit 661d is located at the rotation position immediately below the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the normal flow path 652 enters the probability variation distribution unit 661d. The sphere that has entered the probability variation distribution unit 661d is guided from the probability variation distribution unit 661d to the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661 and proceeds to the rear flow path 654. Then, it enters the certainty variation ball inlet 671 provided on the downstream side of the back flow path 654. The ball enters the probability variation entrance ball opening 671 to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over.

  When the distribution rotator 661 is rotated clockwise by 270 degrees from the rotation position in FIG. 5B, the positive variation distribution unit 661c is located at a position below the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the normal flow path 652 enters the probability variation distribution unit 661c. The sphere entering the probability variation distribution unit 661c is guided from the probability variation distribution unit 661c to the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661 and proceeds to the back flow path 654. Then, it enters the certainty variation ball inlet 671 provided on the downstream side of the back flow path 654. The ball enters the probability variation entrance ball opening 671 to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over.

  In this way, the ball entering the ball flowing down the normal flow path 652 is different depending on the arrangement (rotational position) of the distribution rotator 661. Can attract the attention of. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot can be further improved.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening which is opened and closed separately from the second specific winning opening 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 lights up, the first specifying The winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port are triggered by the ball winning in the first specific winning port 65a while the first specific winning port 65a is opened. A game state in which a large opening provided separately from 650a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time may be formed as a special game state.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the special symbol lottery performed with the entry (starting winning) into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is being executed by a lighting state. By performing a variable display, as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends, the special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, the first entrance 64, and the second entrance The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the mouth 640, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is reserved up to 4 times for each type of ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of special symbols) with few LEDs. Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and when it is a big hit, a special according to the big hit type (big hit A to D). A design (first design) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. To be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 12.1-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 6B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with an attached pattern imitating a character such as planer, furoshiki, helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display 81 (first symbol display 37), The number of entered balls is reserved up to 4 times for each entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserve sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it is indicated that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the through gate 67 is being performed, or after the variation ends. As a stop symbol, the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol is displayed. Done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. The number of times the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reserve lamp 84. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to four maximum holding balls as in the case of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but three times or less, or five. The number of times may be set more than once (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern table 202d and a rotating body pattern table 202e are stored at least.

  The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 10A) is a data table that stores a jackpot determination value of a first winning random number counter C1 described later. Specifically, as the big hit determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, only "0" is defined, and as the big hit determination value in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol, 10 of "1 to 10" The judgment value is specified. If the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is equal to any of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a (see FIG. 10 (a)), the special symbol It is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the judgment of the first hit type counter C2. Values are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 69" in association with "big hit A". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit A" is 70, so "big hit A" is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big hit. The ratio is 70% (70/100).

  Further, "big hit B" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "70 to 99". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit B" is 30, so "big hit B" is determined when the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery. The ratio is 30% (30/100). Therefore, the proportion of the “big hit B” determined is lower than that of the “big hit A”.

  The “big hit A” and the “big hit B” have different operation patterns of the opening / closing operation of the closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650 and the rotating operation of the distribution rotator 661. In the case of "big hit A", the closing plate 650c is changed to the retracted position for 1 second from the start of the 15th round, and the ball can enter (easy) the second specific winning opening 650a. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", a ball can enter (easy) into the second specific winning opening 650a for a maximum of 30 seconds from the start of the 15th round. As described above, the guide member 651a projects 2 seconds after the start of the 15th round (the sphere can flow down to the probability variation channel 653), so that the "big hit B" allows the ball to flow down to the probability variation channel 653. Is possible (easy). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit A", the second specific winning port 650a becomes incapable of entering (difficult) before the guide member 651a projects, so that the ball can be made to flow down to the probability variation channel 653. It will be difficult. Although details will be described later in the description of the rotating body pattern table 202e (see FIG. 12), when the “big hit A” occurs, the distribution rotor 661 is arranged in a period in which a ball can enter. Basically, the normal distribution unit 661a is at the rotational position (position shown in FIG. 5B) immediately below the normal flow channel 652. Therefore, compared to the "big hit B", since the "big hit A" is less likely to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol after the big hit, it is disadvantageous to the player.

  For the special symbol 2, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 69" in association with "big hit C". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit C" is 70, so "big hit C" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1. The ratio is 70% (70/100). Further, "big hit D" is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is a "big hit D" is 30, so "big hit D" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 30% (30/100). Therefore, the proportion of the “big hit D” determined is lower than that of the “big hit C”.

  In the “big hit C”, the closing plate 650b performs the same operation as in the “big hit A”. That is, the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a only during a period (1 second from the start of the 15th round) in which it is difficult to flow into the probability variation channel 653. On the other hand, the “big hit D” performs the same operation as the “big hit B”. That is, a ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a even during a period in which it is easy to flow into the probability variation channel 653 (two seconds after the start of 15 rounds).

  On the other hand, the operation pattern of the distribution rotor 661 in the 15th round of “big hit C” is different from that of “big hit A”. In addition, the operation pattern of the distribution rotor 661 in the 15th round of "big hit D" is also different from "big hit B". Although details will be described later in the description of the rotary body pattern table 202e (see FIG. 12), in the “big hit C”, the normal distribution unit 661a, the normal distribution unit 661a, and the normal distribution unit 661a are arranged according to the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 661 at the start of the big hit. There is a possibility of entering the ball in both the minute portion 661b and the probability variation distribution portions 661c and 661d. Therefore, it is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A".

  Here, the correspondence relationship between the opening / closing pattern of the closing plate 650b and the arrangement of the guide member 651a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the timewise change of the opening / closing operation of the closing plate 650b in the 15th round of “big hit A, C”, and the graph of the interruption in FIG. 13 is the induction in the 15th round of big hit. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a time change of the state of the member 651a, and the lower graph of FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a time change of the opening / closing operation of the closing plate 650b in the 15th round of “big hit B, D”.

  As shown in the graph on the upper side of FIG. 13, in “big hit A, C”, the closing plate 650b is changed to the retracted position for 1 second from the start of the 15th round, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. Then, after 1 second has passed, the closing plate 650b is changed to the projecting position and the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Therefore, the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a only for 1 second from the start of the 15th round.

  On the other hand, as shown in the middle graph of FIG. 13, the guide member 651a is in the immersed state (the state where the sphere is guided to the normal flow path 652) for 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round, and thereafter, The guide member 651a is in a protruding state until the end of the 15th round. That is, since the guiding member 651a is always immersed for 1 second from the start of the 15th round, in the "big hit A, C", the ball entering the second specific winning port 650a enters the normal flow path 652. And flows down.

  Further, as shown in the lower graph of FIG. 13, in the “big hit B, D”, the closing plate 650b is changed to the retracted position from the start to the end of the 15th round, and the second specific winning opening 650a is in the open state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a during the period in which the guiding member 651a is in the protruding state (2 seconds after the start of 15 rounds). Therefore, in "big hit B, D", the ball flows down to the probability variation channel 653 by causing the ball to enter the second specific winning port 650a after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing operation of the closing plate 651b (the opening pattern of the second specific winning port 650a) is made different depending on the type of jackpot. As a result, the degree of expectation of shifting to the specially changed state of the special symbol is made different. As a result, it is possible to play the big hit game by paying attention to the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 10 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is stipulated as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 10 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, as a judgment value for hitting the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined (see FIG. 10 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to. , Ordinarily, it is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  The rotating body pattern table 202e is a data table that defines an operation pattern of the rotating operation of the distribution rotating body 661 in the 15th round of the big hit, for each big hit type. At the 15th round of the jackpot, the operation pattern corresponding to the jackpot type of this time is read out from the rotating body pattern table 202e and set as the operation of the sorting rotor 661 (see S1106 in FIG. 38).

  Details of the rotary body pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rotating body pattern table 202e. As shown in FIG. 12, in the “big hit A”, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise at the start of the 15th round. After that, the rotation operation is stopped until 3 seconds elapse from the start of 15 rounds. Then, after the lapse of 3 seconds, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated clockwise by 270 degrees, and then the operation is stopped until the end of 15 rounds.

  As described above, in the "big hit A", the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a only for 1 second from the start of the 15th round. Therefore, in the case of entering the second specific winning opening 650a in the "big hit A", the distribution rotator 661 reaches the distribution rotator 661 during a period in which the distribution rotator 661 is in the rotation position rotated by 90 degrees.

  As described above, the initial arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 is such that the normal distribution unit 661b is directly below the normal flow path 652. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the low probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 2. That is, since the lottery for the special symbol 1 is likely to be executed, it is easy to determine the “big hit A” or the “big hit B” when the big hit occurs. Therefore, in many cases where the “big hit A” occurs, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the initial position (the normal distribution unit 661a is directly below the normal flow path 652). The sphere reaches the distribution rotator 661 by the arrangement. Therefore, the ball that has entered the normal distribution unit 661a enters the normal entrance 673 through the normal distribution unit 661b (it is difficult to enter the probability variation entrance 671), so the big hit ends. After that, it becomes difficult to give a specially changed state of special symbols. Further, in the “big hit A”, the distribution rotator 661 rotates 360 degrees (90 degrees +270 degrees) in total. That is, since the distribution rotator 661 makes one rotation, when the “big hit A” occurs in the initial placement state, the initial placement is performed again after the big hit ends. Therefore, if the "big hit A" continues in the initial arrangement, it is not possible for the player to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  In the “big hit B”, as shown in FIG. 12, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise at the start of the 15th round. After that, the rotation operation is stopped until 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 15th round. Then, after the lapse of 3 seconds, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise and then stopped until the 15th round is completed. As described above, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is easy to be executed in the initial placement, so that the "big hit B", which is one of the jackpot types selected in the case where the lottery for the special symbol 1 is a big hit, is also performed in the initial placement. It will be easier to win. Therefore, at the end of the "big hit B", the distribution rotor 661 is rotated by 180 degrees (90 degrees + 90 degrees) from the initial arrangement. That is, the probability variation distribution unit 661c is placed directly below the normal flow path 652.

  In the “big hit C”, as shown in FIG. 12, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise at the start of the 15th round. After that, the distribution rotor 661 is stopped until the 15th round is completed. The arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 is maintained until the next big hit.

  In the “big hit D”, as shown in FIG. 12, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise at the start of the 15th round. After that, the rotation operation is stopped until 3 seconds elapse from the start of 15 rounds. Then, after the lapse of 3 seconds, the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise and then stopped until the 15th round is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 17, the state of the second variable winning a prize device 650 (the state of the second specific winning port 650a, the guiding member 651a, and the distribution rotator 661) in each jackpot type is the 15th round. A more specific description will be given of how it changes in.

  FIG. 14: is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd variable winning device 650 in the 15th round of "big hit A". As shown in FIG. 14, in the 15th round of the “big jackpot A”, first, the second specific winning port 650a is set to the open state, and the distribution rotator 661 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees. (See FIG. 14 (a)). In addition, the path length of the normal flow path 652 is a path length at which the rotation operation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is completed before the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a reaches the distribution rotator 661. Has become. Therefore, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can be reliably introduced into the distribution unit at the position rotated by 90 degrees. In the example of FIG. 14, since the initial arrangement is shown at the start of the jackpot, the distribution unit that allows the balls to enter when the ball is rotated 90 degrees enters the normal distribution unit 661a. . Therefore, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a finally enters the normal entrance 673 (see FIG. 14A).

  After that, after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the guide member 651a is projected (see FIG. 14 (b)). Therefore, since the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 650a with the guiding member 651a protruding, it is difficult for the "big hit A" to flow the ball down to the probability variation channel 653. Then, after the guiding member 651a is retracted at the end of the 15th round, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated by 270 degrees (see FIG. 14C). That is, the distribution rotor 661 returns to the arrangement at the start of the big hit. Therefore, if the distribution rotor 661 is initially placed (see FIG. 5 (b)) and continues to win the “big hit A”, the second specific winning opening 650a is obtained in each 15 rounds of the “big hit A”. Since the ball that has entered to enter the normal entrance 673 through the normal distribution unit 661a, it is not possible to make a transition to a state in which the special symbol is changed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  FIG. 15: is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd variable winning device 650 in the 15th round of "big hit B". Since the “big hit B” is basically easy to win when the distribution rotor 661 is in the initial arrangement, the example of FIG. 15 illustrates the case where the distribution rotor 661 is in the initial arrangement at the start of the jackpot. explain.

  In the 15th round of “big hit B”, as with “big hit A”, first, the second specific winning port 650a is set to the open state, and the distribution rotor 661 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees. (See FIG. 15A). That is, the normal distribution unit 661a is arranged immediately below the normal flow channel 652. Therefore, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in this state finally enters the normal winning opening 673 (see FIG. 15A).

  After that, the guide member 651a is projected 2 seconds after the start of the 15th round with the second specific winning opening 650a kept open (see FIG. 15B). Therefore, after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round, it becomes possible to enter the ball into the second specific winning port 650a with the guiding member 651a protruding, so that in the "big hit B", the positive variation current The sphere can be made to flow down into the path 653 (see FIG. 15 (b)). That is, it is possible to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol after the big hit.

  Then, when the 15th round is completed, the second specific winning port 650a is closed and the guiding member 651a is immersed at the end of the 15th round. After that, the distribution rotator 661 is rotated by 90 degrees (see FIG. 15C). That is, the probability variation distribution portion 661d of the distribution rotator 661 is placed directly below the normal flow path 652. Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the “big hit A” to the “big hit D” occur, the distribution rotor 661 is first rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the start of the big hit. 2 It becomes possible to enter the specific winning opening 650a. That is, at the end of the big hit (15 rounds), the sorting parts that are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the sorting parts that are arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 are allowed to enter the next big hit. . Therefore, when the 15th round ends with the probability variation distribution unit 661d of the distribution rotator 661 disposed immediately below the normal flow path 652, the probability variation distribution unit 661c can enter the ball at the next big hit. With the "big hit B", the special symbol can be shifted to the certainty variation state, and the next big jackpot can enter the certainty variation entrance ball 671 regardless of the type of big hit. Therefore, in the case where the distribution rotor 661 is in the initial arrangement, when the "big hit B" is reached, it is possible to make a transition to the probability changing state of the special symbol at least twice consecutively (loop at least twice). , Is extremely advantageous to the player as compared to the “big hit A”.

  FIG. 16: is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd variable winning device 650 in the 15th round of "big hit C". "Big hit C" is one kind of big hit type that is determined when a big hit is obtained by a lottery for special symbols executed based on the entry into the second entrance 640. That is, it becomes easy to be decided in the probability change state of the special symbol (the time saving state of the normal symbol). Therefore, basically, it is determined after the "big hit B" in the normal state or when the probability variation state of the special symbol is continuous (looping). In FIG. 16, the distribution rotor 661 becomes “big hit B” in the state of the initial arrangement, and after transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the case of “big hit C” during the certain variation state is illustrated. ing. That is, at the start of the “big hit C”, the big hit is started in a state where the probability variation distribution unit 661d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652.

  In the 15th round of "big hit C", as with "big hit A, B", first, the second specific winning port 650a is set to the open state, and the distribution rotor 661 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. It is operated (see FIG. 16A). That is, the probability variation distribution unit 661c is placed directly below the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in this state is guided to the rear flow path 654 on the back side of the distribution rotator 661 through the probability distribution distribution unit 661c, and finally the reliable distribution. The ball enters the ball 671 (see FIG. 16A).

  After that, the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, and then the guide member 651a is projected (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, in the “big hit C”, like the “big hit A”, the ball cannot enter the second specific winning port 650a with the guide member 651a protruding. That is, the sphere cannot flow down into the probability variation flow path 653. Then, at the end of the 15th round, the guide member 651a is immersed (see FIG. 16C).

  In this way, in the case of "big hit C", the distribution rotor 661 is changed by 90 degrees (one distribution part) by one big hit. Further, as described above, the “big hit C” has a higher selection rate than the “big hit D” when the big hit is achieved by the lottery of the special symbol 2. Therefore, during the probability variation state of the special symbol, the degree of expectation to be the probability variation state after the next big hit, and the degree of expectation that the probability variation state is continuous are different depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661.

  For example, when the normal distribution unit 661a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 in the probability variation state, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 661d at the next big hit. Regardless of the type of jackpot, it is possible to easily shift to a specially changed state of the special symbol after the next jackpot. Further, the probability variation distribution portions 661c are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the probability variation distribution portion 661d. Therefore, when the next big hit, and the big hit after two times becomes a "big hit C" continuously, it is possible to make the probability variation state of the special symbol continuous for three times (loop three times). Therefore, the arrangement is extremely advantageous for the player.

  Further, when the normal distribution unit 661b is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652, it is possible to enter the normal distribution unit 661a at the next big hit. Therefore, when the “big hit C”, which has a relatively high determination rate, is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball into the certainty change entrance port 671, the certainty change state ends with the next big hit. However, the possibility of shifting to the normal state increases. Therefore, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player.

  Further, when the probability variation distribution unit 661c is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 661d at the next big hit. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to easily enter the probability variation entrance 671 with the next big hit. Therefore, the arrangement is relatively advantageous for the player.

  Furthermore, when the probability variation distribution unit 661d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652, it is possible to enter the normal distribution unit 661a at the next big hit. Therefore, when the “big hit C”, which has a relatively high determination rate, is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball into the certainty change entrance port 671, the certainty change state ends with the next big hit. However, the possibility of shifting to the normal state increases. Therefore, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a state of the second variable winning device 650 in the “big hit D” will be described. FIG. 17: is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 2nd variable winning device 650 when it becomes "big hit D".

  In the 15th round of "big hit B", as with "big hit A to C", first, the second specific winning port 650a is set to the open state, and the distribution rotator 661 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. It is operated (see FIG. 17 (a)). In addition, in this example, since the probability variation distribution unit 661d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 by the rotation operation of 90 degrees, the ball entered into the second specific winning port 650a is moved to the probability variation ball port 671. You can enter the ball.

  After that, the guide member 651a is projected 2 seconds after the start of the 15th round with the second specific winning opening 650a kept open (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round, it becomes possible to enter the ball into the second specific winning port 650a with the guiding member 651a protruding, and thus in the "big hit D", the positive variation current The sphere can be made to flow down into the path 653 (see FIG. 17 (b)).

  Then, when the 15th round is completed, the second specific winning port 650a is closed and the guiding member 651a is immersed at the end of the 15th round. After that, the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 180 degrees (see FIG. 17C). That is, in the example of FIG. 17, the normal distribution unit 661 b of the distribution rotator 661 is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652. As described above, this arrangement is the most advantageous arrangement for the player in the probability variation state (the location in which the probability variation state is likely to loop three times). Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this way, in the case of "big hit D", regardless of the arrangement of the sorting rotor 661, it is possible to easily shift to the probable variation state, and the sorting rotor 661 indicates "big hit C". Are configured to perform different rotation operations (rotation operations in which the total rotation angle is 270 degrees), the number of loops with a certain probability increases or conversely decreases depending on the timing of "big hit D". It may happen.

  For example, in the case where the probability variation distribution unit 661c is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (when the "big hit C" occurs next, it is a disadvantageous arrangement in which the probability variation state is not given), and the "big hit D" occurs, In addition to the probability variation state of the special symbol, the probability variation distribution unit 661d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit. Therefore, in the next big hit, regardless of the big hit type, the ball can enter the probability variation distribution unit 661c for at least 1 second from the start of the 15th round. Therefore, the probability variation state is provided at least twice, including the probability variation state given after the “big hit D”, which can be a very advantageous state for the player.

  On the other hand, for example, in the state in which the normal distribution unit 661b is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (when the probability variation state loops twice when both the next and the big hits after two times are "big hit C"), When the jackpot D "is reached, the normal symbol distribution state is given, but at the end of the jackpot, the normal distribution unit 661a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652. That is, if the proportion selected in the next jackpot is high (70%), "jackpot C", all the balls that have entered the second specific winning port 650a are normally entered from the normal distribution unit 661b. Since the ball enters the ball mouth 672, it becomes a normal state after the big hit. Therefore, the number of loops is lost once (if the "big hit C" continues, the probability variation state loops twice, but the probability variation state ends once), which is disadvantageous to the player. .

  In this way, since the rotation operation of the distribution rotor 661 is different between the “big hit C” and the “big hit D”, depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 at the start of the big hit and the big hit type. , The number of loops in the probability changing state can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played with the expectation that different jackpot types will be obtained depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In the main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 36). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entering ball. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the mouth 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a second The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored at the timing of entering the ball entrance 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, a sphere is common. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the ball entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is the jackpot for the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 10A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and a high probability of a high probability of being a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special The period is a high probability state of the symbol) and for two types, the number of random numbers to be included in each is set differently (see FIG. 10 (a)). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value thereof is set. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is a special symbol big hit time. In this case, the concrete display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Becomes

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is in the first per random number table for low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 10A). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values “1 to 10” are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( (See FIG. 10A). In this way, at a high probability of a special symbol, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “10/300”.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And as shown in FIG.10 (b), it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0-69", the big hit type becomes "big hit A". . When the value is “70 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is selected by lottery and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 69", the big hit type is "big hit C". When the value is “70 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot D”. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hit types (big hits A to D) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "reach out of front and rear" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and back" (for example in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage type depending on the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected, the range of the random number values corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability times. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely missed”. In this table, the "rearward / rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front / rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "rear / rear outreach" or "reach other than front / rear outreach". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is a small probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front / back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front / outside" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-front / rear reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11A) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

  Here, the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 11B) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11C). ) And the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11D) are set at least.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of “0 to 50” is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. The variation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and the variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". MPU201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is off in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. . If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete outlier is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set. Set (Front / Rear Reach, Other Reach Reach).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As for the out-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 149”, and various super-reach various out of the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), "198" is set to various special reach (90 seconds).

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

  FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is missed in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out-of-front and out) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol hold in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 10C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When it matches the value of the random number which is the winning set by the second hit random number table, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table, for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal state of the normal symbol), and for the high probability that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time (of the normal symbol) It is divided into two types, that is, for a period of time saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of which is a big hit is set differently (see FIG. 10C). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (c), at the time of low probability of a normal symbol, there are 15 random number values for winning the regular symbol, and the range thereof is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 16, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/15".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds × 1 time", but is released. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is lit up and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". To be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is released for “1 second × 2 times”, but the release time or The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various flags and counters. Here, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9B, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d. And, special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, normal symbol reservation sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, big hit flag 203i, arrangement storage area 203j, probability variation setting flag 203k, winning number counter 203m, and remaining Ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, round end flag 203q, probability variation valid flag 203r, probability variation valid timer 203s, ball discharge number counter 203t, probability variation passage counter 203u, counter buffer 203y, and others. It has at least a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter The respective values of C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the storage method of the counter value and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding sphere storing area 203b, has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth Area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 03b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the winning order. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas is packed into the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  Special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d, variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize) (third symbol) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first entrance 64, and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 The value is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 29).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 29, S405 in FIG. 31). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next reserved ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to hold, and the display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  Special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, the variable display of the special symbol (the 1st symbol) which is done with the 1st symbol indicator 37 on the basis of the entry to the 2nd entry port 640 (starting winning) (the 3rd symbol) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases. The value is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 29). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S604 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 32).

  When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S605 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S603 of FIG. 33: No). ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It shows that the symbol is a probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability change state of the special symbol is the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the low probability state of the special symbol is the normal state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is also a probability variation state of the special symbol and also indicates that it is a time saving state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, if the probability variation counter 203g value is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol and in the normal state of the normal symbol (the normal state).

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when a ball entering the probability variation entrance ball 671 is detected during the big hit, 100 is set at the end of the big hit (see S1203 in FIG. 39). ), Each time it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the value is subtracted by 1 (see S221 in FIG. 29). The probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 when the next big hit game is started (see S218 in FIG. 29).

  This probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start processing (see S302 in FIG. 30). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S213) is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S213), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, based on the first random number table 202a for high probability, special symbol lottery On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  Further, the probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation process (S508, S514, S519 of FIG. 32). Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the value is 1 or more, based on the second random number table 202c for high probability, the regular symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table 202c for low probability. Further, in the normal symbol variation process, it is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol hits (see S514 and S519 of FIG. 32).

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the jackpot (special game state). If the value of the jackpot flag 203i is ON, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the jackpot is not in jackpot. The jackpot flag 203i becomes a jackpot by a special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1003 in FIG. 37). Further, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1205 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the jackpot flag 203i is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (see S201 in FIG. 29).

  The arrangement storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661. In the arrangement storage area 203j, for example, the arrangement data of any of "00H" to "03H" is stored according to the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661. More specifically, for example, in the initial arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 661b is directly below the normal flow path 652), the arrangement data of "00H" is stored. In addition, at the rotational positions rotated by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees from the initial arrangement, the arrangement data of “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” are stored, respectively. Based on the value stored in the arrangement storage area 203j, the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 can be easily determined. When the value stored in the layout storage area 203j is changed, the state command is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can also accurately grasp the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661.

  The probability variation setting flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state of the special symbol, the ball enters the probability change entrance ball 671 during the jackpot game (the probability change provided at the probability change entrance 671). It is determined whether or not the passage of the switch is detected). When the sphere enters the probability variation ball entrance 671, the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1314 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to off at the end of the big hit. The probability variation setting flag 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the player has entered the probability variation entrance 671 before the power is turned off. The setting flag 203k may be configured to be officially turned on and returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the player has entered the probability variation entrance 671 before power-off can be determined by whether the probability variation passage counter 203u, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) fraud in which only the probability variation setting flag 203k is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. It is possible to prevent giving.

  The number-of-wins counter 203m is the number of game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, , The first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is a counter for counting the number of game balls entered). Specifically, the value is incremented by 1 and updated each time a ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is detected (S1303 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings (value of the winning number counter 203m) and the number of winnings (sphere discharging number counter 203t) of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are accurately changed. After it is determined (S1407 in FIG. 41) whether or not the sum and the passage counter 203u match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. The value of the winning number counter 203m is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it means that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, and the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls inside has elapsed.

  The remaining ball timer 203p, when one preset round is finished and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls won in the device 650 has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are both discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, it is 3 seconds in advance. The corresponding counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203p, the number of winnings and the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 are equal to each other. Whether or not it is done is executed (S1407 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly notify that the ball is clogged inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650.

  If the number of winning coins does not match the number of ejected coins, a dedicated flag is set to ON. The configuration may be such that 203k is not set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

  The round end flag 203q is a flag indicating whether or not one round of the jackpot has ended. If the round end flag 203q is turned on, it means that the so-called ball-stroking period is in progress after the jackpot round is completed. When a ball entering the probability variation ball entrance 671 is detected while the round end flag 203q is on, it is determined that the ball is a regular ball and the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to on. The round end flag 203q is set to ON each time the end condition of each round of jackpots is satisfied (see S1310 in FIG. 40), and the pitching period ends (the probability variation valid timer 203s reaches the upper limit value). In this case, it is set to off (see S1318 in FIG. 40).

  The probability variation valid flag 203r is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the game ball when the game ball enters the probability variation ball inlet 671 after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. is there. When the probability variation valid flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a is less than or equal to the time required to enter the probability variation ball opening 671. ing. That is, the period in which the probability variation valid flag 203r is on indicates that it is a normal period that a ball enters the probability variation entrance port 671.

  The probability variation valid timer 203s is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability variation valid flag 203r is set to ON. The probability variation effective timer 203s can determine (measure) the period required to normally enter the probability variation entrance slot 671 after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a to reach the certainty variation ball opening 671 is 1.5 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.5 seconds, and if the probability variation entry ball 671 is subsequently entered, it is determined to be incorrect and not to pass.

  As a result, in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the player may illegally enter the second specific winning opening 650a to enter the sphere into the certainty variation entrance 671 or below the certain variation entrance 671. Further, it is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the sphere with a piano wire or the like to allow it to pass therethrough, or causing a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The ball discharge number counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the normal winning openings 672 and 673 of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The ball discharge number counter 203t is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of balls won in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 and the number of discharged balls are determined (see FIG. 41). S1407).

  The probability variation passage counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the probability variation entrance port 671 in 15 rounds of the big hit. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged, based on the total of the probability variation passage counter 203u and the above-described ball discharge number counter 203t. The probability variation passage counter 203u is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation passage opening 671 is passed (S1313 in FIG. 40). In addition, after performing the process of determining whether the number of balls won in the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1411 in FIG. 41). The probability variation passage counter 203u is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The counter buffer 203y includes the above-described counters (first random number counter C1, first random type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, variable type counter CS1, second random number counter C4). , A storage area for storing the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 201. The stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, the work area (work area) that stores various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Have

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 35). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning prize. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open / close the mouth 650a and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to them via the input / output port 205. Send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the random number generation IC 800 for effect, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. At least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a back surface type selection table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  The rear surface type selection table 222b is a data table for setting the rear surface type according to the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 and the game state. In the present embodiment, when the variable display is executed, the mode of the variable display is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a, and the rear surface type selection table 222b is referred to to determine whether or not the rear surface type is changed. (See S2105 in FIG. 48). Details of the back surface type selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. The placement of the distribution rotor 661 is notified by a state command output from the main controller 110. This state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. This status command includes the value of the layout storage area 203j provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The layout of the distribution rotator 661 can be accurately determined based on the notified value of the layout storage area 203j. As described above, the placement data “00H” is stored in the placement storage area 203j in the initial placement of the distribution rotator 661, and at the rotation position rotated by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, or 270 degrees from the initial placement, The arrangement data of "01H", "02H", and "03H" are stored respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as the back image of the third symbol display device 81, the back face A and the back face B are provided as the back face type for the low probability of the special symbol. Of these, the back surface B is a back surface type for suggesting an arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 that is more advantageous to the player than the back surface A. On the other hand, rear surfaces C to E are provided as rear surface types for the probability change of special symbols. The back surface E is a back surface type that suggests the most advantageous arrangement for the player, and the back surface D is a back surface type that suggests an advantageous arrangement as compared with the back surface C.

  FIG. 19A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the back surface type selection table 222b. This back surface type selection table 222b is composed of a low probability time selection table 222b1 used in a low probability state of a special symbol and a probability variation time selection table 222b2 used in a probability variation state of a special symbol.

  First, the details of the low-probability time selection table 222b1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 19, in the low-probability time selection table 222b1, selectable rear surface types are defined for each of the current distribution rotator 661 and the current rear surface type. Each back face type is associated with the value of the effect counter 223g that is regularly updated in the range of "0 to 199".

  More specifically, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is the arrangement corresponding to “00H” (that is, the initial arrangement) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface A, the value of the effect counter 223g. The back surface A is associated with the range of “0 to 194”. Further, the back surface B is associated with the range of “195 to 199”. On the other hand, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is the arrangement corresponding to “00H” (that is, the initial arrangement) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface B, the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 0”. The back surface A is associated with the range of "19". On the other hand, the back surface B is associated with the range of the value of the effect counter 223g of "20 to 199". Therefore, when the distribution rotator 661 is in the initial arrangement, it is difficult to change from the back surface A to the back surface B, and when it is changed to the back surface B, it is easy to return to the back surface A. ing.

  On the other hand, when the distribution rotator 661 is arranged corresponding to “01H” (the normal distribution part 661a is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface A, The back surface A is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 179". Further, the back surface B is associated with the range of “180 to 199”. On the other hand, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is the arrangement corresponding to “01H” and the current back surface type is the back surface B, the value of the effect counter 223g is the back surface within the range of “0 to 4”. A is associated. On the other hand, the back surface B is associated with the range of the value of the effect counter 223g of "5 to 199". Therefore, compared to the initial arrangement, the rear surface A is easily changed to the rear surface B, and when the rear surface B is changed, it is difficult to return to the rear surface A.

  Here, as described above, in the 15th round of the jackpot, the ball can reach the sorting rotor 661 in a state of rotating 90 degrees clockwise from the arrangement of the sorting rotor 661 at the start of the jackpot. .. Therefore, in the arrangement in which the normal distribution portion 661a is directly below the normal flow path 652, regardless of the kind of big hit, in the 15th round of the next big hit, it is adjacent to the normal distribution portion 661a in the counterclockwise direction. The probability variation distribution unit 661d can enter the ball. That is, the arrangement corresponding to “01H” is more advantageous than the initial arrangement. Therefore, by shifting to the back surface B and maintaining the back surface B, it can be expected that the arrangement is advantageous, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the low probability state of the special symbol, the distribution rotator 661 is arranged differently from the initial arrangement (arrangement rotated by 270 degrees from the initial arrangement) because the probability variation distribution unit 661d is directly below the normal flow path 652. This is the case when the jackpot is "big hit C" in the arranged state. When transitioning from the probability change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, there are basically two types of "big hit C" and the initial arrangement, or the arrangement that is rotated by 270 degrees from the initial arrangement. Therefore, if the back surface B is reached after the probability variation state ends, it can be expected to shift to the probability variation state again at the next big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from immediately ending after the probability variation state ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the probability variation time selection table 222b2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is the initial arrangement (the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface C, the effect counter 223g is set. The back surface C is associated with the range of values "0 to 198", and the back surface D is associated with the value "199" of the effect counter 223g. When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of “0 to 29”, and the back surface D is associated with the range of “30 to 199”. ing. Therefore, it is difficult to change to the back surface D, and even if it is changed to the back surface D, it is easy to return to the back surface C again. That is, the period in which the back surface C has a low expectation is long. When the “big hit C” occurs in the state of the initial arrangement, the ball enters the normal distribution unit 661a, so that it is not possible to shift to the probability variation state after the big hit. That is, it is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by facilitating the setting on the back surface C in the initial arrangement.

  Further, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 corresponds to “01H” (the normal distribution unit 661a is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface C, , The value of the counter 223g for performance is associated with the back surface C in the range of "0 to 164", the back surface D is associated with the range of "165-198", and the value of the counter 223g for performance 223g is associated with the back surface E. Are associated with. When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface D is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 189", and the back surface E is associated with the range of "190 to 199". ing. When the current back surface type is the back surface E, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 9", and the back surface E is associated with the range of "10 to 199". ing. As described above, the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” can enter the probability variation entrance 671 at the next big hit. In addition, since the probability that the determination rate is high in the next and second big hits is “big hit C”, the probability variation state loops at least three times. Therefore, the arrangement corresponding to “01H” is the most in the probability variation state. This is an advantageous arrangement. Therefore, the rear surface C is easily changed to the rear surface D, and the rear surface D is not easily changed to the rear surface C. In addition, the rear surface E, which indicates the most advantageous state, can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to expect an advantageous state from the transition of the back surface type.

  Further, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is an arrangement corresponding to “02H” (arrangement in which the probability variation distribution unit 661d is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface C, The back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 169", and the back surface D is associated with the range of "170 to 199". When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of “0 to 4”, and the back surface D is associated with the range of “5 to 199”. ing. As described above, the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “02H” is a relatively advantageous arrangement because it is possible to enter the probability variation entrance 671 in the next big hit. Therefore, compared to the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H” or “03H”, the rear surface C is easily changed to the rear surface D, and the rear surface D is not easily changed to the rear surface C. ..

  Further, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is an arrangement corresponding to “03H” (arrangement in which the probability variation distribution unit 661c is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface C, The back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 194", and the back surface D is associated with the range of "195 to 199". When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 19", and the back surface D is associated with the range of "20 to 199". ing. As described above, the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H” is a disadvantageous arrangement in which the probability variation state ends and the state shifts to the normal state when the next “big hit C” occurs. Therefore, as compared with the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” or “02H”, the rear surface C is less likely to be changed to the rear surface D and is easily changed from the rear surface D to the rear surface C. . Therefore, an appropriate degree of expectation can be notified. Note that the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H” is more easily changed to the back surface D than the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”. This is because, when the next "big hit D" occurs, the arrangement after the "big hit D" corresponds to the arrangement data "02H", which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the initial placement is "big hit D", the placement after "big hit D" corresponds to the placement data "03H" which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in consideration of the case of "big hit D", the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data "03H" is configured such that the advantageous back surface type can be selected more easily.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the back surface type that is easily changed is changed according to the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661. Thereby, even a player who does not understand the correspondence relationship between the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 and the degree of advantage can estimate the degree of advantage according to the back surface type, so that a more recognizable effect is provided. be able to.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a probability variation state flag 223e, and a rotation position storage area 223f. At least an effect counter 223g, an excess winning flag 223h, a power-off flag 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area including one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. The winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control unit 110, various information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is obtained. The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the prize information command is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the variation effect suspended in the main controller 110 is retained. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of waiting times) up to four times for each type of special symbol.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is set by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It is designed to be managed on a case-by-case basis.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110 special symbols When the variable display in is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the number of holding balls indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e The command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, from the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, or the special symbol 2 holding ball The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1707 in FIG. 44). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball number of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and after storing the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when this display hold ball number command is received, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number for the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. You can change it while doing it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 44), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2002 in FIG. 47). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 44), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2008 of FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The probability variation state flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variation state. The probability variation state flag 223e is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 44). In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the probability variation state flag 223e whether the state is the probability variation state, and whether the rear surface type is changed is determined.

  The rotation position storage area 223f is a storage area for storing arrangement data indicating the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661. The rotation position storage area 223f has the same configuration as the arrangement storage area 203j of the main controller 110. That is, in the initial arrangement (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 661b is directly below the normal flow path 652), the arrangement data of "00H" is stored, and at the rotational position rotated by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, or 270 degrees from the initial arrangement. , Placement data of “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” are stored, respectively. The rotational position storage area 223f stores the arrangement data stored in the arrangement storage area 203j notified by the status command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 44). In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the probability variation state flag 223e whether the state is the probability variation state, and whether the rear surface type is changed is determined.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter that is referred to when the back surface type is selected at the start of the variable display based on the back surface type selection table 222b. As described above, the back surface type selection table 223b defines the back surface type to be selected for each value of the effect counter 223g. The effect counter 223g is composed of, for example, a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199". The value of the effect counter 223g is updated by 1 in the main process (see FIG. 43), for example. By using the effect counter 223g, it is possible to give randomness to the selection of the back surface type.

  The excess winning flag 223h is equal to or more than a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) during the opening period of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. It is a flag indicating whether or not the ball has won. If this excess winning flag 223h is on, it means that a predetermined number or more of balls have already been entered, and if it is off, it means that the number of winning balls is less than the specified number. This over-winning prize flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined in the jackpot-related processing that the closing command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1802 in FIG. 45), and indicates a start of a new round. It is set to OFF when it is determined that the several commands or the ending command indicating the start of the big hit ending is received (see S1810 and S1813 in FIG. 45). In the present embodiment, when a ball entering the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is detected (when the ball is notified from the main control device 110 by a winning command). When the excess winning flag 223h is referred to and the winning number exceeds the specified number (when the excessive winning flag 223h is on), special notification different from usual is executed (setting a special winning sound). As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the number of award balls, which is larger than the number of award balls normally obtained in one round, can be obtained, so that the player is more satisfied. It can make you feel.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 43). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a fixed time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 42), when the power-off flag 223 y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 42), the power-off flag 223 y remains constant after being set on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1509 in FIG. 42). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, a lapse timer for measuring the effect time, and the like. is doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 44) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2, which will be described later, of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 27) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored in the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 49).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the display control device 114 to operate as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the variation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is "a big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 22 (c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22B and 22C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. FIG. 23B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “sky stage”, respectively. .

  As described above, the back surface A and the back surface B are both back surface types set in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the back surface B is more advantageous than the back surface A (the distribution rotator 661). It is configured so that it can be easily set in (arrangement). On the other hand, the back surface C and the back surface D are the back surface types set in the specially changed state of the special symbol, and the back surface D is set in a more advantageous state (arrangement of the distribution rotator 661) than the back surface C. It is configured to be easy. Further, FIG. 24 shows the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”. As described above, the rear surface E is one of the rear surface types set in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the distribution rotor 661 has the most advantageous arrangement (corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”, of the normal flow path 652). This is a rear surface type that can be set only in the case of the arrangement in which the portion immediately below is the normal distribution unit 661a) (see FIG. 20).

  As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A to D, as shown in FIG. 23, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled by a simple connection.

  When the change of the back surface type is decided based on the back surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 causes the corresponding back surface to be changed. First, the position between a and a ′ of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image of the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

  On the other hand, the back surface image on the back surface E is, as shown in FIG. 24, with the passage of time, in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back surface E is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 24A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black over time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further changes to orange with the passage of time. Then, after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 24 (a) is returned to and the back images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while displaying the "town stage" which is the initial stage. Therefore, the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “River stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 24 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear-side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the startup processing of the above.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data of all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range shown in FIGS. 24A to 24B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIGS. 24A and 24B) including the initial position is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 can be stored when the change of the stage is decided by the lottery at the start of fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the rear surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

  In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surfaces B to D, the range from the position a to the position b is changed from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. This allows the image data from the position b ′ to the position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, on the rear surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 24A and 24B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 24 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 24 (b) to 24 (c) and FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) to (b) is set. As a result, while the images of FIGS. 24A to 24B are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 24B to 24C and 24C to 24A are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images of FIGS. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 24 (b) to 24 (c) and 24 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  It should be noted that, on the rear surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the sub image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back surface image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back surface image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back surface image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be stored is redundantly stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so that the image flows leftward.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, although the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered the ball, the first symbol display device 37, although the variation effect has been started, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 is for resident use. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, and for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state, and the large opening ports (the first large opening port 65a and the second large opening port 650a) that are normally closed are repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The semi-transparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semi-transparent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type is one of the back surfaces A to E corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player. Information that specifies whether to display any one or a rear image different from the rear images A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by the back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to E, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 25) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines such as pachinko machines other than gaming machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 26).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 22A to 22C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2205 in FIG. 49). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3805 in FIG. 60B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2501 in FIG. 51B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2508 of FIG. 51 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 51B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 51 (b) S2509) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 52 to 56) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 57 to 59) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3701 in FIG. 60A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 27) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 27) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 on the basis of the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. )), The pointer update process (see S3405 in FIG. 57) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list to be described later. (Refer to FIG. 27), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite which should start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 27, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved sphere number pattern 1, reserved sphere number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3407 of FIG. 57). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3913 in FIG. 61). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S3914 in FIG. 61). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4002 in FIG. 62).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S2506 of FIG. 51B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when the back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 is received (see S3201 in FIG. 56A). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3909 in FIG. 61) and set to OFF when the back image changing process is executed (see S3910 in FIG. 61). As a result, the back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back face type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the back type corresponding to the ON bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. When the back image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the back image notified by the command is set to this back image discrimination flag 233x (S3202 in FIG. 56). reference). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The back surface image discrimination flag 233x makes it possible to easily specify the currently set back surface type.

  The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 57) (see S3421 in FIG. 57), and the demo display data table is displayed. When another display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is set to OFF (S2705 in FIG. 53A, S2905 in FIG. 54A, S3005 in FIG. 54B). , S3105 in FIG. 55). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 57) (S3414 in FIG. 57), and the confirmation display flag other than the confirmation display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2705 of FIG. 53 (a), S2905 of FIG. 54 (a), S3005 of FIG. 54 (b), FIG. 55 S3105). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmed display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 41. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, The starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S901), it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e from the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, and the extracted value holds the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the sphere counter 223b.

  After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (variable display of the special symbol 1 The number of times of reservation N1) is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 number of reserved balls counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209).

  In the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d. The value (N1) of 1 is subtracted from 1 (S210), and the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved sphere number command (special figure 1 reserved sphere number command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S901), it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 holding sphere number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d from the special figure 1 holding sphere number command, and the extracted value holds the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the sphere counter 223b.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S212), and the process proceeds to S213. To do. In the process of S213, which is executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is ended. The details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol lottery is performed. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of jackpots A to D is determined.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and in the case of the big hit C, , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of a big hit D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S217). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S217: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 (S218), the start of the jackpot for the special symbol is set (S219), and the process to S222. And transition. When the jackpot start of the special symbol is set by the process of S219, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes, and the opening command is set. (S1002). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S220), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. If there is (S220: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222. In the process of S222, a stop command is set (S222), and then this process ends. Although illustration is omitted, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted by the processing of S221 becomes 0, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol has shifted to the low probability state. Set the status command to notify.

  The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state and the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 (the arrangement data stored in the arrangement storage area 203j) included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b, the "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" lottery (judgment determination) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, which is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and , Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, referring to the state of the probability variation counter 203g, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change of the special symbol (that is, the probability change counter 203g is on) (S302: Yes), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 10A) one by one. As described above, ten random numbers "1 to 10" are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability variation (that is, the probability variation counter 203g is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 10 (a)), a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit It is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value “0” stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, "0"), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot for the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined as a jackpot for the special symbol (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b to determine what the big hit type is. . As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 69”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (15R short open big hit). However, if it is in the range of “70 to 99”, it is determined to be a big hit B (15R long open big hit) (see FIG. 10B). On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 is a big hit in the lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 69”, it is determined that it is a big hit C (15R short open big hit), If it is in the range of "70 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot D (15R long open jackpot) (see FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ( Change time).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 being set, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front / rear reach, non-front / rear reach, or complete disengagement is set. .

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear disconnection is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol comes off in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 36). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31, a start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Is a process for executing a process of holding the values indicated by the various random number counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d ( If N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the special symbol 1 holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The special figure 1 reserved sphere number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and external output processing (S901) of main processing (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is extracted from the reserved sphere number command, and the extracted value is the special symbol reserved sphere number counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command in the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, it is determined whether the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) (S407). In this process as well, similar to the process of S401, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S408). ), It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 4 When it is determined that it is not less than (that is, 4) (S409: No), this processing is ended as it is, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the special symbol 2 is held. One is added to the value (N2) of the sphere number counter 203e (S410). Then, the special symbol 2 holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The special figure 2 reserved sphere number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and external output processing (S901) of main processing (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e from the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, and the extracted value holds the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the sphere counter 223b.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding sphere number command in the process of S411, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value is stored in the first area of the empty space holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and this processing ends and the timer interrupt is performed. Return to processing. In the process of S412, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and is associated with the second symbol variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S501). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included in the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the period in which the special symbol is in the probability changing state and the period in which the normal symbol is in the time saving state match. Therefore, in the process of S508, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and if the value is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S509). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because the special symbol big hit (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, so the second winning opening This is because the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is opened to prevent the sphere trying to win the second specific winning opening 650a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

  In the process of S509, if it is not in the special symbol big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10C).

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S512), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S512: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514), and if it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit now (S515). ). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, if the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. The time is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S512: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S518). In the processing of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S519), when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more) (S519: Yes). ), The variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0) (S519: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds. (S521), the present process ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S522). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S522, if the variation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for normal symbols is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S523, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or the processing of S518, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S905) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 28), and it is judged whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, the passage of a ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S603). : No), the present process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. In the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous power-off process was not normally completed, the process proceeds to S814 in this case as well.

  If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S814. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S914 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S814, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S814). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S815, S816) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S815, S816) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S815, S816) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S815, S816), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S815), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S816).

  After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed in the process of S816, the distribution rotor 661 is set to the initial arrangement (S817). That is, the rotating body motor 662a is driven to set the normal distribution portion 661b directly below the normal flow path 652. It should be noted that the distribution rotor 661 is provided with an origin sensor (not shown), and is configured to turn on (the output is high) when the distribution rotor 661 is initially placed. Therefore, in the processing of S817, the output of the origin sensor is monitored, and the distribution rotator 661 is rotated until the output becomes high. After the process of S817 is completed, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S808). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the placement storage area 203j are read (S811), and a status command for notifying the read values of the probability variation counter 203g and the placement storage area 203j to the voice lamp controller 113 is set (S812). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state and the placement data of the distribution rotor 661 included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10. After the process of S812 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S813), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special lamp variation process (see FIG. 29) and the start winning process (see FIG. 31) set the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command, special figure 2 reserved ball number command) to the voice lamp control device. Send to 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the Jackpot control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The process is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, whether the maximum opening time has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a for each round in the big hit state , Or determine if a specified number of balls have been won. When either of these conditions is established, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a is repeated in the 1st to 14th rounds, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed in the 15th round. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, if the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the variable display that is normally, in the display mode set by the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32) or the process of S518, stop display of the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 255 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  In addition, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 34 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 35) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the first specific winning a prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening mouth) 65a (1st to 14th rounds) and the second specific winning opening (second large opening mouth) 650a (15th round).

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1003), and this process is ended.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1004). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1004: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1005). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1005: Yes), the operation of the large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a) and the operation of the distribution rotator 661 according to the number of rounds are performed. The jackpot operation setting process for setting is executed (S1006), and this process ends. The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1005, if it is not the start timing of the new round (S1005: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1007). Specifically, when the special game state (all 15 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached.

  In the processing of S1007, when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1007: Yes), the ending command is set (S1008), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the audio lamp control in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1007, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1007: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current big hit (special game state) (S1009). That is, it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1009, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1009: No), depending on the winning of the large opening (the first large opening 65a, the second large opening 650a) The winning process for performing the above process is executed (S1011). The details of the winning process (S1011) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1011) is completed, an abnormal process is performed to determine whether the ball that has entered the large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a) has been normally discharged. Then (S1012), the present process is terminated. Details of this abnormality processing (S1012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1009, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1009: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the jackpot end is executed (S1010), and the present process is ended. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1010) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1006) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1006). This big hit operation setting process (S1006) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, the large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a) according to the number of rounds. ) And the operation of the distribution rotator 661.

  When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, it is first determined whether it is the start timing of 15 rounds (S1101). If it is not the start timing of 15 rounds (S1101: No), it is started this time. This means that the first large opening 65a is opened (S1102) and the present process is terminated because it means that the round to be performed is any one of 1 to 14 rounds. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is the start timing of 15R (S1101: Yes), the opening pattern (see FIG. 13) of the second large opening port 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1103), The read release pattern is set (S1104).

  When the process of S1104 ends, then, the operation pattern corresponding to the jackpot type of this time is read from the rotating body pattern table 202e (see FIG. 12) (S1105), and the read rotation operation of the distribution rotor 661 is set. Yes (S1106). Then, the operation of the guide member 651a (see FIG. 13) is set (S1107), and this processing ends.

  By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38), it is possible to accurately set the opening pattern and the operation of the distribution rotator 661 according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1010) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S1010). This jackpot end processing (S1010) is executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37) and, as described above, is a processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end.

  In the jackpot ending process (S1010), first, the data in the arrangement storage area 203j is shifted by the number of bits according to the jackpot type this time (S1201). More specifically, with respect to the value stored in the arrangement storage area 203j, the jackpot type in which the distribution rotor 661 rotates 90 degrees according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotating operation corresponding to the jackpot may be used. For example, 1 is added, 2 is added for a jackpot type that rotates 180 degrees, 3 is added for a jackpot type that rotates 270 degrees, and 0 is added for a jackpot type that rotates 360 degrees. When the value after addition exceeds "03H", 4 is subtracted from the value so that the value becomes any of "00H" to "03H". As a result, the arrangement data indicating the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 can be updated accurately.

  When the process of S1201 is completed, it is then determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203k is on (S1202). This means that a sphere has entered, so by setting the value of the probability variation counter 203g to 100, a probability variation state of 100 times is set after a big hit (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, if the probability variation setting flag 203k is off (S1202: No), the processing of S2103 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1204.

  In the process of S1204, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot is set from the respective values of the arrangement storage area 203j and the probability variation counter 203g (S1204), the jackpot flag 203i, and Both the probability variation setting flags 203k are set to OFF (S1205), and this processing ends.

  By executing this jackpot ending process (see FIG. 39), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set depending on whether or not the player has entered the probability variation ball entrance 671 during the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40, the details of the winning process (S1011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1011). This winning process (S1011) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, it corresponds to the winning of the large opening (the first large opening 65a, the second large opening 650a). This is a process for controlling.

  In the winning process (S1011), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the valid period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, an interval period (3 seconds) from the open state of the large opening (first large opening 65a or second large opening 650a). It is the period until the end. In the process of S1301, if it is not the round valid period (S1301: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the current round is in the valid period (S1301: Yes), then, a prize is awarded to the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a). It is determined whether or not it is detected (S1302), and if the winning for the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203m is set. 1 is added and updated (S1303). Then, a winning command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the winning of the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is set (S1304), and the process proceeds to S1305. .

  The winning command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the winning command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a winning sound for notifying the winning of the ball. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that a prize ball will be awarded based on the winning. Therefore, it is possible to please the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if the winning of the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is not detected (S1302: No), the processing of S1303 and S1304 is skipped, The process moves to S1305.

  In the process of S1305, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203m is 10 or more (S1305), and if the value of the winning number counter 203m is 10 or more (S1305: Yes), the winning number becomes the upper limit value. As a result, a close command for notifying that the large opening (first large opening 65a or second large opening 650a) has been closed is set (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  The closing command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the closing command, it sets the winning sound to be set for the subsequent winning to a special winning sound different from the normal winning sound. That is, the number of balls that exceed the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round (11 or more) due to a plurality of balls winning the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) at the same time. When a winning a prize is detected, a special winning sound is set. This allows the player to recognize that more prize balls than usual will be paid out. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1305, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203m is 9 or less (S1305: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1306), and if the round time has elapsed. (S1306: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  In the process of S1308, the open large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is set to be closed (S1308), and the guiding member solenoid 209 is set to OFF to guide the vehicle. The member 651a is immersed (S1309). Then, after the remaining ball timer flag 203n, the probability variation valid flag 203r, and the round end flag 203q are set to ON (S1310), the process proceeds to S1311.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1306, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1306: No), at the closing timing of the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a). Since it means that there is not, the processing of S1308 to S1310 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1311.

  In the process of S1311, it is determined whether or not the round end flag 203q is on (S1311), and if the round end flag is off, the process proceeds to S1312. On the other hand, if the round end flag 203q is turned on (S1311: Yes), it means that it is a ball-blanking period after closing the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203r is on (S1315). In the process of S1315, if the probability variation valid flag 203r is off (S1315: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203r is on (S1315: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s (S1316), and then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is the upper limit value (1. It is determined whether it is 5 seconds) (S1317). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is not the upper limit value (S1317: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1312, and the process of monitoring the entry into the probability variation entrance ball 671 and updating the probability variation setting flag 203k is executed. To do. As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203s is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the probability variation switch (whether the ball has entered the probability variation entrance port 671). The probability variation game state can be set. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being improperly passed by passing the ball through the probability variation switch.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is the upper limit value (S1317: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203r and the round end flag 203q are set to OFF (S1318), and the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is reset (S1319). ), And this processing ends.

  In the process of S1312, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation switch (entered at the probability variation entrance ball 671) (S1312), and if the ball has not passed through the probability variation switch (S1312: No), This processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch (S1312: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203u (S1313), the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1314), and this processing is executed. finish.

  Next, the abnormality processing (S1012) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1012). This abnormal process (S1012) is a process executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, the large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a) This is a process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered is normally discharged.

  In the abnormality processing (S1012), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the round valid period (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is in the valid period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed a ball discharge switch (not shown) (S1402). As the ball outlet switch, there are a first outlet switch for detecting a ball discharged from the first variable winning device 65, and a ball discharged from the normal ball inlets 672, 673 of the second variable winning device 650. A second ejection switch for detection is provided.

  In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has passed one of the ball discharge port switches (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ball discharge number counter 203t (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. . On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1404). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1404: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is in the ball-expelling period, and the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (S1406), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S1406: No), the book is left as it is. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S1406: Yes), then the number of discharged particles (the value of the probability variation passage counter 203u and the value of the ball discharged number counter 203t) It is determined whether the total value) matches the winning number (S1407).

  In the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the number of ejected coins does not match the number of winning coins (S1407: No), an error command is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, if the game ball is left illegally in the second variable winning device 650 and, for example, the distribution rotator 661 is the big hit A in the initial arrangement state, the ball is inserted into the certainty variation ball inlet 671. Fraud can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that the discharged number and the winning number match (S1407: Yes), the process of S1408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is reset (S1410). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203m, the ball discharging number counter 203t, and the probability variation passage counter 203u are reset (S1411), and this processing is finished.

  By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 41), a ball clogging occurs in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650, or the like, so that the large opening (first large opening 65a, or It is possible to early detect and notify the occurrence of the problem that the ball entering the second large opening 650a) is not normally discharged. Further, in the 15th round of the big hit, the ball is left unjustly on the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 (upstream of the guide member 651a), and the guide member 651a is projected (the ball is the positive variation channel 653). It is possible to detect an improper act of causing the ball to flow down onto the guide member 651a at an early stage by observing the timing (after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round) when it becomes a state in which the ball can be guided to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 42, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1616 (see FIG. 43) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 43, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 43), the power-off process of S1616 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1616 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1502: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1616 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written by the process of S1506. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the startup processing this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508. .

  In the process of S1502, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1502: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the power-off process of S1616, It is started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1504, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the storage areas of the entire range of the RAM 223 are checked (S1504), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1505). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  In the process of S1505, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( (S1506), the process proceeds to S1508. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1505, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1616 is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 43). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed, the process of S1508 with the power-off flag 223y being turned on is the moment when the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after a general power failure has occurred and the processing is started in a state in which the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  After the process of S1510, the probability variation state flag 223e and the rotation position storage area 223f are updated according to the notification content of the state command set in the startup process (see FIG. 35) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (S1511). ). With this, the state of the pachinko machine 10 (game state and arrangement of the distribution rotator 661) can be accurately grasped after the power is turned on. After the process of S1511, the interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1504 to S1506 is followed via S1508. Or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509 which is a work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processes of S1510 to S1512 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1509 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1504 when the processing of S1508 is reached through the processing of S1504 to S1506. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1602 to S1610, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the variable display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1602 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1605 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the reserved quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the display control device 114 causes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the big hit due to the change this time, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives the feeling of expectation to the big hit. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as a determination button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1608), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1609, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output processing of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1610 ends, the process moves to the process of S1611. In the processing of S1611, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

  When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the processing of S1613, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1613: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S1615), and the power is turned on. A disconnection process is executed (S1616). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1617), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1614: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination processing (S1611) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1702), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. (S1703), this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 The value (holding number N1 of variable display in special symbol 1), or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in special symbol 2) is extracted, and this is special in the voice lamp control device 113. It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (S1708). In the process of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1708 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) or when the special symbol is drawn. Since it is transmitted, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is set to the main controller 110 by the processing of S1708. The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e can be adjusted. Therefore, due to noise or the like, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number 203e Even if it is deviated, at the time of detection of the start winning and the lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and It can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. When the process of S1708 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether the state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1709). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S1709: Yes), the values of the probability variation status flag 223e and the rotational position storage area 223f are updated according to the received command (S1710). That is, based on the information corresponding to the game state (whether or not the probability variation state) included in the status command, when the probability variation state is notified, the probability variation state flag 223e is set to ON and the normal state is notified. If so, the probability variation state flag 2223e is set to OFF. Also, the arrangement data included in the state command is stored in the rotation position storage area 223f. As a result, when the state of the pachinko machine 10 (one or both of the gaming state and the placement of the distribution rotor) is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if the state command has not been received (S1709: No), then a jackpot-related command (either a closing command, a winning command, an opening command, a round number command, or an ending command) is received. It is determined whether or not (S1711). When it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S1711: Yes), the jackpot-related command is determined, the jackpot-related processing for executing the corresponding control is executed (S1712), and this processing is ended. To do.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1711, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S1711: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1713), and this processing ends. In the process of S1713, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a jackpot-related process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this jackpot related processing (S1712).

  In the jackpot-related process, first, it is determined whether or not a closing command is received (S1801), and if a closing command is received (S1801: Yes), a large opening (first large opening 65a or second) Since this means that the maximum number of balls (10 balls) has been won in the large opening 650a), the excessive winning flag 223h is set to ON (S1802), and this processing is ended. By turning on the excess winning flag 223h, a special notification sound can be set at the time of winning a prize for the large opening thereafter. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the number of award balls, which is larger than the number of award balls normally obtained in one round, can be obtained, so that the player is more satisfied. It can make you feel.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, when it is determined that the closing command is not received (S1801: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning command is received (S1803). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1803: Yes), a winning effect setting process for setting a winning sound (winning effect) associated with the winning of the large opening is executed (S1804), This process ends. Details of this winning effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1803, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1803: No), it is then determined whether the opening command has been received (S1805), and the opening command has been received. If (S1805: Yes), the opening command for display is set (S1806). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect for notifying the start of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81. When the process of S1806 ends, the main jackpot-related process (see FIG. 45) ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1805, when it is determined that the opening command is not received (S1805: No), it is then determined whether the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1807). When it is determined that the round number command is received (S1807: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1808), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. Yes (S1809). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S1809, the excessive winning flag 223h is set to OFF (S1810), and this processing is ended. By setting the excessive winning flag 223h to OFF here, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the special winning sound from being set every time the ball wins the large opening mouth during the execution of a new round. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused because the meaning of the special winning sound becomes unclear.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1807, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1811). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1811: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1812), the excessive winning flag 223h is set to OFF (S1813), and this processing is ended. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1811, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1811: No), this processing ends. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to jackpots.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the winning effect setting process (S1804) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the winning effect setting process (S1804).

  In the winning effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the excessive winning flag 223h is turned on (S1901), and if the excessive winning flag 223h is turned on (S1901: Yes), it is output along with the winning of the large opening. The special winning sound is set as the sound effect (S1902). Next, a display winning effect command corresponding to the excessive winning effect is set (S1903), and this processing is ended. By setting a special winning sound and excess winning performance, it is easy to let the player understand that it was possible to win a number of balls exceeding the specified number into the large opening mouth, so it is easier than the normal round It is possible to give satisfaction to having won many prize balls.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the excess winning flag 223h is not on (S1901: No), the normal winning sound is set as the sound effect output along with the winning of the large opening (( S1904). Next, a display winning effect command corresponding to the normal winning effect is set (S1905), and this processing is ended.

  By executing this winning effect setting process, it is possible to execute winning effects corresponding to the number of winnings to the large opening. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player whether or not an excessive prize has been generated and more prize balls than usual can be obtained. Therefore, depending on the number of prize balls acquired, the player can be notified. It can make you feel satisfied.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1612). This fluctuation display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S2007 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2002), and then S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44). In the process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, a back image changing process for determining whether to change the back image is executed (S2006), and then the process proceeds to S2007. The details of the back image changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2007, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2007). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2007: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2007: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S2008), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44). At, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2009). Next, based on the stop type acquired in the process of S2009, a display stop type command is set (S2010), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display stop type command, the stop type of the third symbol is controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. To be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the rear image change processing (S2006) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the back image changing process (S2006). The back image changing process (S2006) is a process for determining whether or not to change the back image, as described above.

  When the back image change process (see FIG. 48) is executed, first, the probability change state flag 223e provided in the RAM 223, the value of the effect counter 223g, and the content of the rotation position storage area 223f are read (S2101). It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the specially changed state of the special symbol (S2102). Then, in the process of S2102, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state (S2102: Yes), the rotation position from the probability variation time selection table 222b2 of the back surface type selection table 222b, and the value of the effect counter 223g are corresponded. The rear surface type to be selected is selected (S2103), and the process proceeds to S2105.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2102, when it is determined that the state is not the probable variation state (that is, the normal state) (S2102: No), it corresponds to the rotation position from the low-probability time selection table 222b1 and the value of the effect counter 223g. The back surface type is selected (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105.

  In the process of S2105 executed after the process of S2103 or S2104, it is determined whether or not the rear surface type is changed (S2105). That is, it is determined whether the rear surface type read from the rear surface type selection table 222b is different from the current rear surface type, and if it is determined that the rear surface type is not changed (S2105: No), this processing To finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S21205, when it is determined that the rear surface type is to be changed (S2105: Yes), a display rear surface image change command for notifying the rear surface type after the change is set (S2106), and this processing is ended. .

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 62. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 49, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, the MPU 231 does not directly read and process the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. , Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2303). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 49). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is ended, and the boot process is ended.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 50, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be performed after the process of S2302. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. Alternatively, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2302.

  As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 49. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2203, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2205). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3702 in FIG. 60A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 22 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51B). The determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 51B) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 51B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given. When it is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2205, the interrupt permission is set (S2206), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51A, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 27) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 51B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2502) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2503) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2502), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed, and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56.

  In the display setting process (S2503), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like, for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81. The content of the image is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, the task process is executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2504), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505). , And sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, out-of-front / rear reach, other than out-of-front / outside) The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete disengagement) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 22 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed, and the S2504 Move to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2502) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2603).

  Then, first of all the unprocessed commands, it is judged whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2705), and this processing ends.

  By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 53A), the display setting process updates the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2704, and the display data table buffer 233d is updated by the process of S2701. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted to specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, S2702. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of 1., and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is Character ROM 23 beforehand From to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2703 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. If it is determined in the process of S2604 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606). If there is a display stop type command (S2606: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2607), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (either big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / out, or complete disconnection) is dealt with. The stop type table is determined (S2801), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51 (b)) is executed, and the third is compared. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2802).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2803), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation based on the data table is started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2504), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2803, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2801, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2802.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2606, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2608: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2609) and the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the opening command process (S2609) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S2905), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2608, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), and display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S2610: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the round number command processing (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp controller 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3001). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3002).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3004). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are turned off (S3005), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the process of S2610, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2612), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2612: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2613), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, details of the ending command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3102).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3104). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3105), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. In the processing of S2612, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2614), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2614: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2615), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2615) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON to notify the normal image transfer setting process (S3703) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command. Then, among the bits forming the back surface image determination flag 233x, the bit corresponding to the back surface type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and the bits corresponding to the other back surface types are set to off (S3202). ), The back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S3201 is turned on, each bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S3202 is changed to the changed back face. Specify the image type. If the specified back image type is the back images B to E, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing (S2504), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in S3202. From the above, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  In the present embodiment, when performing variable display, a lottery (discrimination) as to whether or not to change the rear surface type is performed. Since the variable display has a variable time of at least 7 seconds, it does not receive more than one back image change command within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing command determination processing, 2 Although there should be no case where the above back image change command is stored, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise etc. and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a back image change command. . In the process of S3202, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. In the processing of S2614, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2614: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2616), and there is an error command. If (S2616: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2617), and the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the error command process (S2617) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. The error command process is a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3302), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3302, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. When it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2616 (S2616: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2618), and the process returns to S2601.

  In the processing of S2601 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), And the processes of S2602 to S2618 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2602 to S2618 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the processing of S2601 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2508) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 22, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 53A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 53B), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and For a command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 53A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2701. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2702, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, details of the above-described display setting process (S2503) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if the new command flag is off (S3401: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3402 to S3404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3402), and then S3403 to S3404. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3403). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3404).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3501).

  In the task processing (S2504), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle of each sprite are specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 57. After the warning image setting process (S3404) or in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3403: No), the process proceeds to S3405.

  In the processing of S3405, pointer updating processing is executed (S3405). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3601, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Is determined (S3602). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f is updated past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3603), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3603: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3605), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3606), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3602, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3602: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

  Here, returning to FIG. 57, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S3406 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3407), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3408). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3408: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag 233z is on. Yes (S3409).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is OFF (S3409: No), the confirmed display data table is not displayed yet, and the confirmed display effect is generated. Therefore, first, the confirmed display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. (S3410), and then, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3411). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3412), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3414), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3415), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2504), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the variation was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3415, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if the confirmed display flag 233z is on (S3409: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S3416). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3416: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. The contents are cleared by setting in the table buffer 233d (S3417) and then writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3418). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3420), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3421), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  As a result, after the fixed display effect is finished, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3416, if the demo display flag 233y is turned on (S3416: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is directly performed. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2509) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 51B). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The display data table that defines that the image (1) in FIG. 22 (b) or (c) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, details of the transfer setting process (S2505) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3702), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for causing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3701, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It means that it has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3702) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S3702).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S3801), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S3801: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3802). In the process of S3802, after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S3802 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3802: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to S3803. Further, as a result of the processing of S3801, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the processing proceeds to S3803.

  In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3803: No), it is not A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the resident image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3803, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S3803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3805), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 51B) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 51B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 52 to 56) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 57 to 59) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S3701: No in FIG. 60A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a normal image transfer setting process (S3703) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3405) of the previously executed display setting process (S2503). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3902), and if it is transfer data information (S3902: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3903, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to step S3905.

  In the process of S3902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3902: No), the processes of S3903 and S3904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3905. In the process of S3905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3906).

  In the process of S3906, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the process of S3906 that the transfer process is not completed (S3906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to S3907. Also, as a result of the processing in S3905, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3905: No), the process proceeds to S3907.

  In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907). If the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3908), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3903 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3907: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S3909).

  If the back image change flag 233w is turned on (S3909: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is turned off (S3910), it is provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the on-state among the back image discrimination flags 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3911). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) ) Is acquired (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3913.

  In the process of S3909, if the rear image change flag 233w is not turned on but is turned off (S3909: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  If the bit of the back image discrimination flag 233w in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back face A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the normal video RAM 236. There is no image data to transfer to. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the bit in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is directly terminated.

  In the process of S3913, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). The determination in the process of S3913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3913 (S3913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3913, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3914). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3914, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3915), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a sub as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the above-described drawing process (S2506) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated (S4001). That is, in the process of S4001, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2504). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4002, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S4003). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 51B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the first variable winning a prize device 65 and the second variable award winning device 65 are provided as prize winning devices that are awarded by hitting a ball when a big hit occurs. Two winning devices, the variable winning device 650 and the variable winning device 650 are provided. The first variable winning device 65 can enter a ball in the first to 14th rounds of a big hit, and the second variable winning device 650 can enter a ball in a 15th round of a big hit. In addition, inside the second variable winning a prize device 650, the probability variation entrance 671 in which the probability variation state is set after the big hit by the ball entering, and the ball entering the second variable award winning device 650 are accurately changed. A distribution rotator 661 that distributes to any of a plurality of ball entrances (ball entrance areas) including the ball entrance 671 is provided. The distribution rotator 661 is provided with a plurality of distribution units (normal distribution units 661a and 661b, and positive variation distribution units 661c and 661d) around which the sphere can enter, and the sphere enters. The balls are distributed to the entrances corresponding to the distribution unit. In other words, the ball entrance into which the sphere is distributed differs depending on the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661.

  The distribution rotator 661 performs different rotation operations according to the jackpot type in 15 rounds of the jackpot. That is, the rotation amount (movable amount) of the distribution rotor 661 is different for each jackpot type. Further, the timing at which the ball can be entered into the second variable winning device 650 is changed according to the type of jackpot (the opening pattern of the second specific winning port 650a is also changed). As a result, the balls can enter the second specific winning port 650a at different rotation positions for each jackpot type. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the game during the big hit by paying attention to the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 and the kind of the big hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big hit from being a work for simply obtaining a prize ball. However, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 at the end of the big hit is configured to be maintained until the next big hit. Thereby, even in the case of the same jackpot type, the easiness of the balls to be distributed to the probability variation entrance 671 (the degree of advantage for the player) is changed according to the arrangement of the sorting rotor 661 at the start of the jackpot. You can That is, even in the case of the same jackpot type, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the degree of advantage and the degree of disadvantage are different according to the type of jackpot previously won (history of jackpot). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, different rotation operation patterns of the distribution rotator 661 are set for jackpots in which the same opening pattern is set for the same second specific winning opening 650a according to the gaming state at the time of jackpot. It is configured. And, in the low probability state of the special symbol, a disadvantageous opening pattern (difficult to enter the probability variation entrance 671) becomes advantageous in the probability variation state of the special symbol (easy entry into the probability variation entrance 671) Will be configured). That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the advantages and disadvantages of the open pattern are changed according to the state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation operation of the distribution rotor 661 is changed according to the jackpot type, and the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 at the end of the jackpot is held until the next jackpot. , The advantage is made different according to the history of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of using the second variable winning device 650, it may be configured to be controllably realized by a process when selecting a jackpot type. More specifically, as jackpot types, there is a definite variation jackpot that always leads to a probable state after a jackpot if you win, and a regular jackpot that always transitions to a normal state after a jackpot when you win. The history of is stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Then, it is possible to change the ratio of the probability-changing jackpot according to the history of jackpots stored in the RAM 203. For example, when the previous time is the normal jackpot, the proportion of the normal jackpot selected is high, and in the case of the probability-varying jackpot, the probability of selecting the probability-varying jackpot is high. As a result, in the normal state, it is not possible to easily shift to the probability variation state, but once it is possible to shift to the probability variation state, it is possible to realize a game characteristic in which it is easy to continuously shift to the probability variation state. It is possible to play a game with a sharpness depending on the state. Further, when the probability variation jackpots are, for example, three or more consecutive, it may be configured to increase the rate at which the regular jackpots are determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the probability variation state being too continuous and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed. Moreover, since the second variable winning device 650 can be deleted, the cost ratio of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, four distribution units (normal distribution units 661a and 661b, and positive variation distribution units 661c and 661d) are provided for the distribution rotation body 661. However, the normal distribution unit and the positive variation distribution units are provided. The ratio to the parts and the total number of the distribution parts are not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily. The distribution rotator 661 is not limited to the circular shape, and may have any shape such as a triangle or a quadrangle. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation pattern (rotation angle) of the rotation operation set in the distribution rotor 661 is changed according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the distribution rotor 661 is simply rotated at a constant rotation speed, and the time until the 15th round is completed is made different so that the rotation amount (movable amount) of the distribution rotor 661 until the jackpot is completed. The jackpot may be different for each type. As a result, the operation pattern of the distribution rotator 661 can be reduced, so that the amount of data in the rotator pattern table 202e can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the rotational position at which the ball can enter is determined for each jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the distribution rotator 661 may be rotated at a speed at which it is difficult to aim at the distribution unit, and the opening time of the second specific winning port 650a may be changed according to the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a simpler game in which the longer the opening time, the easier the ball enters the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 71. In the above-described first embodiment, the easiness of shifting to the probability changing state after the big hit is variable by changing the rotating operation of the distribution rotor 661 for each big hit type. In addition, depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 at the start of the big hit, the ease with which the probability change state is changed (the rate of entering the sure change entrance 671) is different even for the same big hit type. . As a result, a novel game property is realized in which the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 and the combination of the jackpot type are advantageous or disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the operation of the distribution rotator 661 at the time of a big hit is common, and the opening pattern of the second specific winning port 650a in the 15 rounds of a big hit is made different, so that the ball can easily enter. The distribution part is different. Further, instead of the distribution rotator 661, a distribution rotator 6610 provided with a section in which two normal distribution units are continuous and a section in which three normal variability distribution units are continuous is used, and the deterministic variation state is used. The probability variation state is configured to loop up to three times in accordance with the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 at the first transition to. The number of loops is different depending on the type of jackpot that has transitioned to the probability change state. As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the jackpot type and the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in structure is that the distribution rotating body 6610 is used instead of the distribution rotating body 661. The guide member 651a provided in the variable winning device 650 is abolished, and the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can always reach the sorting rotor 6610. A part of the configuration of the ROM 202 provided is changed, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is changed, and a configuration executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The point that the partial processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is the point that it is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 63, the structure of the distribution rotor 6610 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the distribution rotator 6610 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 63 (b) is a front view of the distribution rotator 6610. As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the distribution rotator 6610 has a plurality of distribution units capable of distributing the sphere to either the positive variation entrance 671 or the normal entrance 672 or 673. Is provided. Specifically, the normal distribution unit 6610a that can distribute the ball to the normal entrance port 673, the normal distribution unit 6610b that can distribute the ball to the normal entrance port 672, and the probability variation entrance ball 671. Probability variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e that can be distributed to are provided. Similar to the normal distribution units 661a and 661b in the first embodiment, the normal distribution unit 6610a and the normal distribution unit 6610b communicate with each other. Further, similar to the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d in the first embodiment, the probability variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e can guide the sphere to the back side of the distribution rotation body 6610. That is, it is possible to make the ball enter from the rear flow path 654 to the probability variation ball inlet 671.

  The distribution rotor 6610 according to the present embodiment is set with an operation pattern of a rotation operation that repeats the rotation operation for one distribution unit and the stop operation for a predetermined period (2 seconds) in 15 rounds of the big hit. It This operation pattern continues until the end of 15 rounds. That is, the operation continues until the opening operation (opening pattern) of the second specific winning opening 650a predetermined for each jackpot type is completed. In addition, although the details will be described later, the opening pattern in the present embodiment is an opening pattern in which the second specific winning port 650a is opened during a stop period (first period) after the rotation operation for one sorting unit. , The opening pattern in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the stop period (second period) after the rotation operation for one distribution unit is performed twice, and the rotation operation for one distribution unit is 3 times. An opening pattern is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the stop period (third period) after the game is repeated (see FIG. 66).

  By using the distribution rotator 6610, it is possible to focus attention on the distribution part into which the balls enter, so that it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being a work for obtaining a prize ball, and to enjoy the game during the jackpot. Can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, in the second embodiment, the guide member solenoid 209 for changing the guide member 651a is deleted as the guide member 651a is deleted.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b is referred to for determining the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, as in the first embodiment. Data table.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, four types of "big hit E" to "big hit H" are associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is stipulated. Specifically, as a jackpot type that is selected when a jackpot is hit in the lottery for the special symbol 1, "big jackpot E" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 being "0 to 49", The "big jackpot F" is associated with the range of "50 to 74", and the "big jackpot G" is associated with the range of "75 to 99".

  As will be described later in detail, the “big hit E” is set with an opening pattern in which the second specific winning port 650a is in an open state during a stop period (first period) after rotating by one sorting unit. It is a jackpot type, and “jackpot F” is a state in which the second specific winning opening 650a is in an open state during a stop period (second period) after the sorting rotator 6610 has performed two rotation operations for one sorting unit. Is a jackpot type in which an opening pattern is set, and the “jackpot G” indicates that the second specific winning opening 650a is in the stop period (third period) after the rotation operation for one sorting unit is performed three times. It is an open pattern that opens.

  Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that becomes "big hit E" is 50 from "0 to 49", so it was a big hit in the lottery for the special symbol 1. In this case, the ratio of "big hit E" is 50% (50/100). In addition, since the counter value that is “big hit F” is 25 pieces of “50 to 74”, when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the ratio of “big hit F” is 25% (25/100). . Further, since the counter value that is "big hit G" is 25 pieces of "75 to 99", the proportion of "big hit G" is 25% (25/100) when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1. .

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2, "big hit H" is associated with all the values of the first hit type counter C2 "0 to 99". When this “big hit H” is reached, an opening pattern is set in which the second specific winning port 650a is in an open state during a stop period that is set after the sorting rotor 6610 rotates by one sorting unit. That is, the same opening pattern as "big hit E" is set.

  Details of the open pattern for each jackpot type will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes in the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a for each jackpot type (for each opening pattern). As shown in FIG. 66, when the "big hit E" is reached, the second specific winning port (second large opening) 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the 15th round. The second specific winning opening 650a in the present embodiment is closed when the total opening period is 2 seconds or when 10 balls have entered. Since up to 100 balls can be launched per minute (about 3 in 2 seconds), it is extremely difficult to enter 10 balls in 2 seconds. Therefore, in the 15th round of "big hit E", the second specific winning opening 650a will be closed 2 seconds after being opened.

  On the other hand, in the rotating operation of the distribution rotating body 6610 in this case, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, at the same time as the 15th round of the jackpot is started, the rotating operation is clockwise by 72 degrees (for one distribution unit). Is performed for 0.2 seconds, and then the operation of stopping for 1.8 seconds is performed. Therefore, the distribution unit that is adjacent in the counterclockwise direction to the distribution unit that is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the start of the jackpot can enter the ball in the 15th round. If the distribution unit that can enter the ball is the probability variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e, by shifting the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a, the special symbol transitions to the probability variation state after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the distribution unit that can enter the ball is one of the normal distribution units 6610a and 6610b, the normal state is set after the jackpot regardless of whether or not the ball can be entered. . Since 15 rounds are completed during the stop operation, the distribution rotor 6610 is completed without performing the subsequent operations. That is, the distribution rotator 6610 is at the rotation position in which the distribution unit 6610 is rotated clockwise by one distribution unit at the end of the “big hit E”. This arrangement is maintained until the next jackpot.

  Since “big hit E” is a type that is easy to win in a low probability state of a special symbol, at the start of the big hit, basically, one of the normal distribution units 6610a and 6610b is arranged directly under the normal flow path 652. Becomes When the normal distribution unit 6610b is the “big hit E” in the initial arrangement (the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”) immediately below the normal flow path 652, the normal distribution unit 6610a can enter the ball. , After the jackpot is over, it shifts to a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of a normal symbol). In this case, at the end of the big hit, the normal distribution unit 6610a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”).

  In addition, when the normal distribution unit 6610a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”) and becomes “big hit E”, it is provided next to the normal distribution unit 661a in 15 rounds. It is possible to enter the determined probability variation distribution unit 661e. Therefore, by entering the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to shift to the probability changing state after the big hit. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610e is located immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “02H”).

  As described above, when the “big hit H” is reached, the same opening pattern as that of the “big hit E” is set. Therefore, even in the case of “big hit H”, the ball can enter the ball in the arrangement in which the distribution unit rotates by one from the start of the large value. Since "big hit H" is a big hit type that is easy to win in the probability variation state, basically, the distribution rotor 6610 at the start of the big hit is arranged such that the probability variation distribution parts 6610c to 6610e are directly under the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the number of loops in the probability variation state thereafter changes according to the number of consecutive probability variation distribution parts.

  Specifically, if the probability variation distribution unit 6610e is directly below the normal flow path 652 at the start of the big hit, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610d in this big hit, and the probability variation distribution unit in the next big hit. Since it becomes possible to enter the 6610c, the probability change state for two times is given (loop twice more). On the other hand, if the probability variation distribution unit 6610d is immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the start of the big hit, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610c at this big hit, but at the next big hit, the normal distribution unit 6610b. Since it is possible to enter the ball, the probability change state ends once. Further, if the probability variation distribution unit 6610c is immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the start of the jackpot, it is possible to enter the normal distribution unit 6610b at this jackpot, so the probability variation state is not given and the normal state is achieved. And transition.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 66, when the "big hit F" is reached, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the 15th round, but is closed in 0.2 seconds. Since it is difficult to enter the ball within 0.2 seconds, the second specific winning port 650a is closed without entering the ball during the opening period of 0.2 seconds. The closed state is maintained for 2 seconds, and after 2 seconds, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened again. This open state is maintained for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (2 seconds-0.2 seconds). Since it is extremely difficult to enter 10 balls in 1.8 seconds, in most cases, the second specific winning port 650a is closed after being opened for 1.8 seconds, and the 15th round is completed.

  On the other hand, in the rotating operation of the distribution rotating body 6610 in this case, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, at the same time as the 15th round of the jackpot is started, the rotating operation is clockwise by 72 degrees (for one distribution unit). For 0.2 seconds and then for 1.8 seconds to stop, and then again rotate clockwise 72 degrees (for one distribution unit) for 0.2 seconds, and then perform 1 second again. ．Stop operation for 8 seconds. Since the period of this second stop operation coincides with the opening period of 1.8 seconds in the “big hit F”, in the “big hit F”, from the arrangement of the sorting rotor 6610 at the start of the big hit, the distribution unit 2 is used. The sphere can reach the distribution rotator 6610 in the arrangement in which the sphere is rotated by one (144 degrees). Since 15 rounds are completed during the stop operation of the distribution rotator 6610, the distribution rotator 6610 ends its operation without executing the subsequent operations. That is, the distribution rotator 6610 is at the rotation position in which it rotates clockwise by two distribution units at the end of the “big hit F”. This arrangement is maintained until the next jackpot.

  Like the "big hit E", the "big hit E" is a type that is easy to win in a low probability state of a special symbol, so at the start of the big hit, either the normal distribution unit 6610a or 6610b is basically the normal flow path 652. It will be in the state immediately below. When the normal distribution unit 6610b is the “big hit F” in the initial arrangement (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”) immediately below the normal flow path 652, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610e. , By entering the second specific winning opening 650a, it shifts to the probability changing state after the jackpot. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610e is located immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “02H”).

  In addition, when the normal distribution unit 6610a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”) and the “big hit F” occurs, the ball enters the probability variation distribution unit 6610d in 15 rounds. It will be possible. Therefore, by entering the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to shift to the probability changing state after the big hit. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H”).

  As shown in FIG. 66, when the “big hit G” is reached, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the 15th round, but is closed in 0.2 seconds. As described above, it is difficult to enter the ball within 0.2 seconds, so the second specific winning opening 650a is closed without entering the ball during the opening period of 0.2 seconds. . The closed state is maintained for 4 seconds, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened again after 4 seconds. This open state is maintained for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (2 seconds-0.2 seconds). Since it is extremely difficult to enter 10 balls in 1.8 seconds, in most cases, the second specific winning port 650a is closed after being opened for 1.8 seconds, and the 15th round is completed.

  On the other hand, in the rotation operation of the distribution rotor 6610 in this case, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, the rotation operation for 0.2 seconds and the stop operation for 1.8 seconds are alternately repeated, and the third rotation is performed. The third stop period set after the operation coincides with the opening period of the second specific winning port 650a in the "big hit G". Therefore, in the “big hit G”, the sphere can reach the sorting rotor 6610 by the arrangement in which the sorting rotor 6610 is rotated by three sorting portions (216 degrees) from the placement at the start of the jackpot. Since 15 rounds are completed during the stop operation of the distribution rotator 6610, the distribution rotator 6610 ends its operation without executing the subsequent operations. That is, the distribution rotator 6610 is at the rotation position rotated clockwise by three distribution units at the end of the “big hit F”. This arrangement is maintained until the next jackpot.

  Like "big hit E" and "big hit F", "big hit G" is a type that is easy to win in a low probability state of a special symbol, so at the start of the big hit, either of the normal distribution units 6610a and 6610b is basically available. The orb is normally placed immediately below the flow path 652. When the normal allocating unit 6610b is “big hit G” in the initial arrangement (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”) immediately below the normal flow path 652, the normal allocating unit 6610b is divided by three. Since it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610d, which is a part of the game, by entering the second specific winning opening 650a, the probability variation state is achieved after the jackpot is over. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H”).

  Further, when the normal distribution unit 6610a is arranged immediately below the normal flow channel 652 (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”), when the “big hit G” is reached, three normal distribution units 6610a are divided in 15 rounds. It is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610c, which is the distribution unit described above. Therefore, by entering the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to shift to the probability changing state after the big hit. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610c is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “04H”).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the operation of the distribution rotator 6610 is constant, and a plurality of jackpot types having different opening patterns of the second specific winning opening 650a are provided, whereby the second specific winning opening is formed. The rotation amount (variable amount) of the distribution rotator 6610 until the ball can enter the 650a is made different. Whether or not it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e (whether or not it is advantageous to the player) changes depending on the timing at which the ball can enter, so the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. The game can be played by paying attention to the timing when it is played. Therefore, the interest of the player in the 15th round of the jackpot can be improved. In addition, in the second embodiment, the rotation amount (variable amount) of the distribution rotation 6600 until the end of 15 rounds is changed by changing the period in which the jackpot round is ended, and at the end of the jackpot. The distribution rotor 6610 is arranged differently. Accordingly, it is possible to identify whether or not the next big hit is likely to be in the probability changing state by the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 6610 at the end of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 at the end of the big hit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 65 (b), regarding the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type at the time of transition from the low probability state of the special symbol to the probability variation state of the special symbol (at the time of probability variation rush), and the number of continuous occurrences of the probability variation state explain. FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of continuous probable states in accordance with the big hit type and the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 in the case of the big hit type. As described above, in the probability variation state, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is basically performed, so that the "big hit H" is determined when the big hit occurs. That is, in the probability variation state, the sorting unit rotates one by one each time the jackpot is hit. Therefore, how many times the probability variation state is continuously set is different depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 at the end point of the jackpot that first enters the probability variation entrance 671.

  As shown in FIG. 65B, when the “big hit E” occurs in the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 6610a is directly below the normal flow path 652), the “big hit E” occurs. Including the given probable state, the probable state is entered three times in succession. That is, over the three big hits ("big hit E", and twice "big hit H"), a special variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit. Since the probability variation state continues three times, three big jackpots are made at short intervals, so that the "big hit E" triggers the transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the “big hit F” is generated in the arrangement (initial arrangement) corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”, the probability variation state given after the “big hit F” is included three consecutive times. Then, the state changes to the probability change state. That is, over the three big hits (the “big hit F” this time, and the “big hit H” twice), a certain variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 at the time of “big hit F” is the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 6610a is directly below the normal flow path 652). Two consecutive transitions to the probable state. That is, the number of continuous probability variation states is smaller than that in the case of "big hit F" in the initial arrangement.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the "big hit G" occurs in the arrangement (initial arrangement) corresponding to the arrangement data "00H", the probability variation state given after the "big hit G" is consecutively repeated twice. To shift to the probability change state. That is, a special variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit over two big hits (the “big hit G” this time, and the next “big hit H”). On the other hand, when the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 at the time of “big hit G” is the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” (the arrangement where the normal allocating unit 6610a is directly below the normal flow path 652). , The probability change state ends once.

  In summary, in the arrangement (initial arrangement) corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”, when the “big hit E” does not shift to the probability changing state after the big hit, and when the “big hit F” occurs, the probability changing state occurs three times after that. Continuously (loop 3 times), when the "big hit G" is reached, the probability variation state continues 2 times thereafter (loops 2 times). Therefore, in the initial arrangement, the "big hit F" is the most advantageous and the "big hit E" is the most disadvantageous.

  On the other hand, in the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 6610a is directly below the normal flow path 652), when the “big hit E” is reached, the probability variation state continues three times (three times). When the "big hit F" is reached, the probability variation state continues twice thereafter (loops twice), and when the "big hit G" is reached, the probability variation state is given only once. Therefore, in the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data "01H", the "big hit E" is the most advantageous to the player (the probability variation state is looped the most times). On the other hand, when the "big hit G" is reached, the number of loops becomes the smallest (the probability variation distribution units 6610d and 6610e are skipped, and only the probability variation state based on the ball entering the probability variation distribution unit 6610c is provided). It will be a disadvantage.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the number of continuous probability variation states (the number of loops) to be shifted thereafter is different based on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 and the jackpot type that is won in the low probability state. It is configured. As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of jackpot and the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the probability variation time selection table 222b2 in the second embodiment will be described. Like the probability variation selection table 202b in the first embodiment, the probability variation selection table 222b2 is a data table used for selecting the back surface type in the probability variation state of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, in the 15th round in the probability variation state, the “big hit H” that rotates by one distribution unit is selected. One of the above is placed. Therefore, the probability variation selection table 222b2 in the present embodiment defines the arrangements corresponding to the arrangement data “02H” to “04H”.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the distribution position of the distribution rotator 661 is "02H" (the probability variation distribution unit 6610e is directly below the normal flow path 652), and the current rear surface type is rear surface. In the case of C, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 164", the back surface D is associated with the range of "165 to 198", and the value of the effect counter 223g is " The rear surface E is associated with "199". When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface D is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 189", and the back surface E is associated with the range of "190 to 199". ing. When the current back surface type is the back surface E, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 9", and the back surface E is associated with the range of "10 to 199". ing. The arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data "02H" is a very advantageous arrangement in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is given even after the next big hit and the big hit two times after. Therefore, as compared with the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H” or “04H”, the rear surface type (the rear surface D or the rear surface E) having a higher expectation degree is easily set. Thereby, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified from the back surface type.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, the distribution position of the distribution rotator 661 corresponds to “03H” (where the probability variation distribution unit 6610d is directly below the normal flow path 652), and the current rear surface type. Is the back surface C, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 169", and the back surface D is associated with the range of "170 to 199". When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of “0 to 4”, and the back surface D is associated with the range of “5 to 199”. ing. The arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H” is a relatively advantageous arrangement in which the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the next big hit. Therefore, as compared with the layout corresponding to the layout data “04H”, the back surface D having a higher expectation is set more easily. Thereby, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified from the back surface type.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the distribution position of the distribution rotator 661 is the position corresponding to “04H” (the position where the probability variation distribution unit 6610c is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type. Is the rear surface C, the rear surface C is associated with the value of the effect counter 223g in the range of "0 to 198", and the rear surface D is associated with the value "199" of the effect counter 223g. When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of “0 to 29”, and the back surface D is associated with the range of “30 to 199”. ing. The arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “04H” is the most unfavorable arrangement in the probability variation state because it becomes the normal state after the next big hit. Therefore, compared to the other arrangements, the rear surface C having a lower expectation is more likely to be formed. As a result, the back surface type and the actual expectation can be linked, and the player can be notified of the appropriate expectation.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 68 and 69. First, details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 68. The big hit operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 68) in the second embodiment is the same as the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. 65a, the operation of the second large opening 650a), and the operation of the distribution rotator 661. The same parts as those in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The big hit operation setting process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment is different only in that the process of S1107 of the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is deleted, and S1101 to S1106. In each process, the same process as each of S1101 to S1106 of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is executed. This is because the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment does not have the guide member 651a, and it is not necessary to execute the process of S1107 for setting the guide member 651a.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 69, the winning process 2 (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the winning process 2 (S1022). The winning process 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment is the same as the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, which is a large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a). This is a process for performing control according to winning a prize. The same parts as those in the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  In each of S1301 to S1308 and S1310 to S1319 of the winning process 2 (S1022) in the second embodiment, S1301 to S1308 and S1310 to S1319 of the winning process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40), respectively. The same processing as each processing of is executed.

  Further, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1308 ends, the rotor motor 622a is stopped (S1321), and the process proceeds to S1310.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the distribution rotor having the section where the two normal distribution sections 6610a and 6610b are continuous and the section where the three positive variation distribution sections 6610c to 6610e are continuous. 6610 was adopted. Then, as the jackpot type, a type in which the distribution unit rotates by one distribution unit from the arrangement at the start of the jackpot and a ball can enter the distribution unit in the arrangement after the rotation operation (Emoji E, H) And a type (big hit F) in which the ball can enter the sorting part of the arrangement after the rotation operation while rotating by two distribution parts from the arrangement at the start of the big hit, and It is configured to rotate from the arrangement by three distribution units, and to provide three types of big hits including a type (big hit G) in which a ball can enter the distribution unit after the rotation operation. . Further, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot H) that rotates by one distribution unit is configured to be easily determined from the arrangement at the start of the jackpot. With such a configuration, in the normal state, the number of continuous probability variation states can be changed to 1 to 3 times depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 when the ball first enters the probability variation distribution unit. Can be made. That is, it is possible to change the number of consecutive probability-change states thereafter according to the type of jackpot when entering the probability-change state. Therefore, in the normal state, the advantageous jackpot type and the disadvantageous jackpot type can be made different according to the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610. That is, in 1 arrangement, the probability variation state is difficult to continue, but in different arrangements, the probability variation state tends to be continuous. It is difficult to enter the probability variation state with 1 arrangement, but it is difficult to enter the probability variation state in different arrangements. It is possible to provide a jackpot type or the like, which is possible and whose probability change state is likely to continue thereafter. Therefore, different jackpot types can be expected depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Note that, in the second embodiment, in the probability changing state, only the “big hit H” that rotates by one distribution unit is easily determined from the arrangement at the time of starting the big hit, but it is also configured in the probability changing state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a jackpot type that rotates by two or three distribution units is determined. This makes it possible to expect different jackpot types depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 even in the probability changing state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the second embodiment, only the jackpot type having 15 rounds of jackpots is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of rounds may be varied. For example, the number of rounds of jackpot E may be 2, the number of rounds of jackpot F may be 8, the number of rounds of jackpot G may be 15, and the number of rounds of jackpot H may be 15. In addition, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 2, a jackpot I of two rounds and a jackpot J of eight rounds are provided, and jackpots H to J are Alternatively, the rotation operation set for the distribution rotor 6610 may be common. Further, in this case, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured such that an opening pattern is set in the first round or the second round. With this configuration, the number of prize balls can be sharpened, so that the degree of advantage and the degree of disadvantage can be further diversified. In other words, in the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”, the big hit E results in three consecutive successive probable states, which is advantageous as the number of consecutive probable states, but is most unfavorable for a prize spherical surface. . Therefore, even if the probability variation state becomes small, a player expecting a jackpot type (jackpot F, G) with a larger number of prize balls, or a jackpot E, the maximum number (3 times) of the probability variation state is given. Depending on the taste of the player, such as the player who is expected to be played, it is possible to make different types of happy jackpots. In addition, as a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 2, by providing big hits H to J, while maintaining the number of consecutive continuous in the probable variation state specified from the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 when entering the probable variation state. Therefore, the number of prize balls can be varied. Therefore, once the player suddenly enters the probability change state, it is possible to play the game in the expectation that it will be a jackpot type having a larger number of prize balls. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game after entering the probability change state from being just like the work of winning a specified number of jackpots. In each jackpot, the number of rounds (the number of prize balls that can be acquired) is a jackpot. The type can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the probability changing state becomes monotonous.

  In the second embodiment, five distribution units (normal distribution units 6610a and 6610b, and positive variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e) are provided for the distribution rotation body 6610, but the normal distribution unit and the positive variation units are provided. The ratio to the distribution unit and the total number of distribution units are not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily. Further, the distribution rotator 6610 is not limited to a circular shape, and may have an arbitrary shape such as a triangle or a quadrangle. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In the second embodiment, the rotation operation of the distribution rotor 6610 is changed according to the jackpot type, and the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 at the end of the jackpot is held until the next jackpot. Although the degree of advantage changes depending on the combination of the arrangement of the minute rotation body 6610 and the type of jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of using the second variable winning device 650, it may be configured to be controllably realized by a process when selecting a jackpot type. More specifically, for example, as a jackpot type, a definite variation jackpot that transitions to a definite variation state of a special symbol after a jackpot and a normal jackpot that transitions to a normal state after a jackpot are provided, and the jackpot history of the main control device 110 is set. The configuration is stored in the RAM 203. Then, when the probability variation jackpot is obtained by the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the number of consecutive probability variation jackpots is set within the range of 1 to 3 times in accordance with the history of the jackpots stored in the RAM 203. It may be configured. That is, as the history until the probability variation big hit, it may be controlled so that the larger the number of times of continuous success of the normal big hit, the easier it is to set a large number of times of success. With such a configuration, even if the normal jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player continues, it can be expected that more probability variation states continue after that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from decreasing even when the jackpot is usually won.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in 1 to 14 rounds of the jackpot, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in 15 rounds. However, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. The round may be set arbitrarily. For example, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in the first round of jackpot. With such a configuration, the player can more quickly know whether or not to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol after the big hit. Therefore, when the ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 671 in the first round, the subsequent games of the 2nd to 15th rounds can be played at ease.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the first ball entrance 64 may be provided. Then, depending on whether or not the special symbol is in the probability changing state, the operation pattern of the rotation operation set for the distribution rotor 661 or the distribution rotor 6610 may be different. With this configuration, the number of second entrance ports 640 can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other embodiment to configure a gaming machine.

  In each of the above embodiments, the normal symbol hit state in the normal state of the normal symbol (at low probability) was set to 1/10 (24/240), but the hit probability is not limited to this, and a lower probability. (For example, 1/240) may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal symbol to hit the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes more difficult to be executed. Therefore, trying to execute the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method in which the ball is aimed at the right side of the game board 13 (always right hitting) even in the normal state of the normal symbol. it can. In addition, as a method for suppressing an irregular game method, for example, a configuration in which a lottery for normal symbols is not suspended may be adopted. With such a configuration, even if the player always makes a right hit, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes long (30 seconds), so it is normal only once in 30 seconds. In addition to not being able to execute the lottery of symbols, all passing through the through gate 67 during the change of symbols is a useless ball. Therefore, when the right hitting is performed in the normal state of the normal symbol, the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be more difficult to be executed, so that the irregular game method of always performing the right hitting is more surely suppressed (prevented). You can Further, as a method for suppressing the irregular game method, for example, the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol may be made longer (for example, 10 minutes). With this configuration, the lottery interval of the ordinary symbols in the normal state of the ordinary symbols can be made longer, so that the lottery of the ordinary symbols becomes difficult to be performed, and the second symbol enters the second entrance 640. Can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method of always performing right hitting.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and the stop is displayed. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction of the game machine installation location due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (V winning rate is changed according to the history of operation of V character)
A ball-entering means into which the game ball can enter, a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball-entering means, and the discriminating means results in a specific discrimination. On the basis of the above, in the gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player and a variable ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter during execution of the privilege game, The first ball entry area, which is arranged inside the ball means and is capable of entering the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, the second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area, and the first On the basis of the fact that the game ball has entered the ball-entering area, the special-purpose awarding means for giving a specific privilege and the determination result by the determination means result in the game for the first ball-entering area. By the entry rate setting means for setting the entry rate of the ball and the entry rate setting means The gaming machine to the ball entrance rate set, characterized in that it comprises a ball entrance rate determination means for determining based at least on the entering sphere rate setting last entry spheres rate set by the means A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a winning is performed by a lottery executed based on a starting ball, a specific winning opening is provided in which the ball is set in an open state where In some cases, a privilege is given when a ball enters the winning opening. In addition, in some of the conventional game machines, a specific winning area is provided inside the specific winning opening to which a probability varying state is given when the ball enters. In addition, the ease of entering a specific entry area is made different according to the type of hit (for example, JP 2012-245172 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the easiness of entering a specific entry area is fixed according to the hit type, when the hit type is known, the state shifts to a probability variation state. In some cases, the degree of expectation may be known, and it may be difficult to maintain the degree of expectation for the probability fluctuation state.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the variable ball entering means is provided with a first ball entering area and a second ball entering area different from the first ball entering area. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance area, the privilege granting means grants a specific privilege. Based on the result of the determination made by the determination means being a specific result, the entry rate of the game ball to the first entry area is set by the entry rate setting means. Here, the entry rate set by the entry means is determined by the entry rate determining means based at least on the previous entry rate set by the entry rate setting means.

  As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed in accordance with the previously set entry rate, which makes it difficult for the player to predict the entry rate. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not a specific privilege will be granted, and thus it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the specific privilege for a longer period of time.

  In the gaming machine A1, it is possible to change between a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are distributed into the first entrance area and a second allocation state in which the game balls are distributed into the second entrance area. The distribution rate determining means includes a distribution means, and determines the distribution pattern of the distribution means as one distribution pattern from a plurality of distribution patterns having different distribution rates for the first distribution area. The game machine A2, wherein the filled-in-ball-rate setting means controls the distribution means to be variable according to the distribution pattern determined by the entering-ball-rate determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1. That is, the variable distribution means is provided between the first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are allocated to the first entrance area and the second allocation state in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area. ing. As the distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined by the distribution rate determining means from among a plurality of distribution patterns having different distribution rates for the first distribution area, and the distribution determined by the distribution rate determining means. It is controlled by the entry rate setting means so that the distribution means can be changed depending on the pattern.

  As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed according to the distribution pattern set in the distribution means, so that the distribution pattern to be set can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  The gaming machine A3 is provided with a holding means for holding the incoming ball rate set by the incoming ball rate setting means in the gaming machine A1 or A2 at least until the determination result is the specific determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the holding rate is held by the holding means until the entering rate set by the entering rate setting means reaches a specific determination result at least next time by the determining means. Therefore, when determining a new ball entry rate by the ball entry rate determining means, it is sufficient to refer to the ball entry rate held by the holding means, and to reduce the processing load when determining the ball entry rate. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine A2, the state of the sorting means at the time when the control based on the sorting pattern set by the entry rate setting means is finished is held until at least the next determination result is the specific determination result. A gaming machine A4 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the state of the sorting means at the time when the control based on the sorting pattern set by the entry rate setting means is completed is at least next determined by the determination means. Since the holding means holds the result until the result is reached, when the distribution pattern is set by the entry rate setting means, it is only necessary to start the distribution pattern from the state at the start of the big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when setting the distribution pattern can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A4, the distribution means switches between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in accordance with a predetermined order while being controlled to be varied by the ball entry rate setting means. Yes, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the plurality of sorting patterns are configured so that the variable amounts of the sorting means are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A4, the following effects are produced. That is, the distribution means is configured to switch between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in accordance with a predetermined order while being controlled to be variable by the entry rate setting means. The plurality of distribution patterns are configured so that the variable amounts of the distribution means are different from each other.

  As a result, the rate of entry into the first entry area varies depending on the variable amount of the distribution means, so that the operation of the distribution means can be focused on during the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the privilege game from becoming a monotonous game in which the game ball is only aimed at the variable ball entering means.

  In the gaming machine A5, the sorting means is composed of a rotating body having one or a plurality of the first ball entry areas and one or a plurality of the second ball entry areas, and the first entry is made according to a rotational position. A gaming machine A6, characterized in that the game balls have different entrance rates to the ball area.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5. That is, the distribution means is composed of a rotating body provided with one or a plurality of first ball entry areas and one or a plurality of second ball entry areas. In such a rotating body, the ball-entering rate of the game ball with respect to the first ball-entering area differs depending on the rotational position.

  As a result, the bonus game can be played while paying attention to the rotational position of the rotating body during execution of the bonus game, so that the bonus game is a monotonous game in which the game ball is only aimed at the variable ball entrance means. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the privilege granting means grants, as the specific privilege, a second game state that is more likely to result in the specific determination result by the determining means than in the first game state in which the specific privilege is not granted. The distribution means has a section in which a plurality of the first ball entry areas are continuously arranged along the rotation direction, and the ball entry rate determination means determines the identification in the second gaming state. When the result of the determination is No, it is easier to determine the distribution pattern in which the variable amount of the distribution means corresponds to one entry area in comparison with the first game state. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6. That is, as compared with the first game state in which the specific privilege is not provided, the second game state in which the determination unit is likely to have the specific determination result is provided by the privilege providing unit as the specific privilege. The distribution means is provided with a section in which the plurality of first ball entry areas are continuously arranged along the rotation direction. When the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the distribution pattern in which the variable amount of the distribution means corresponds to one entry area is easily determined by the entry rate determination means as compared with the first game state. Become.

  As a result, when the second game state is entered in the section where the first ball entry area is continuously arranged, it becomes easy to continuously enter the first ball entry area in the subsequent privilege game. . Therefore, the second game state, which is advantageous to the player, can be easily continued, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the privilege granting means sets the second game state in which the specific determination result is likely to be the specific benefit by the determining means in comparison with the first game state in which the specific benefit is not granted. The entry rate determining means is, as compared with the second gaming state, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the rotational position at the start of variation and the variable end A gaming machine A8, which facilitates determination of the distribution pattern in which the rotational position at time coincides.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the following effects are produced. That is, as compared with the first game state in which the specific privilege is not provided, the second game state in which the determination unit is likely to have the specific determination result is provided by the privilege providing unit as the specific privilege. Compared to the second game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first game state, a distribution pattern in which the rotational position at the time of variable start and the rotational position at the time of variable end match is determined by the ball entry rate determining means. It will be easier to decide.

  As a result, in the first gaming state, even if a specific determination result is obtained, it becomes difficult to enter the second gaming state. That is, since the first game state is likely to be continuous, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to be too high.

<Characteristic group B> (Advantageous winning type is changed according to the state)
Based on the determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the specific determination result by the determination means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game As the privilege game executed by the executing unit, based on the type determination unit capable of selecting one type of the privilege game from a plurality of types determined in advance and the specific determination result by the determination unit, The state setting means for setting one state out of a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player, the type of the privilege game selected by the type selection means, and the state before the privilege game is executed. A game machine B1 provided with a state determination means for determining the state set by the state setting means at least.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the start winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. Among such conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that is provided with a time saving state or a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player after winning, as a privilege for winning. Further, among the conventional gaming machines, there is one in which the period of the time saving state to be given is different according to the gaming state even if the hit type is the same (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-130998).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that variations in the added value added are scarce.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the determination means makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination means gives a specific determination result, so that a bonus game advantageous to the player is given. It is executed by the privilege game executing means. As the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type of privilege game is selected from the plurality of types determined in advance by the type selecting means. Further, the state setting means sets one state out of a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player based on the specific determination result by the determination means. The state set by the state setting means is determined by the state determining means based on at least the type of privilege game selected by the type selecting means and the state before the privilege game is executed.

  Thereby, the state after the execution of the privilege game can be determined according to the state before the privilege game is executed, so that the game state set after the privilege game can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, the state determination means has a first state in which the determination result by the determination means is unlikely to be the specific determination result and a second state in which the specific determination result is more likely to be compared to the first state. At least a determinable game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the first state in which the discrimination result by the discriminating means is unlikely to be the specific discrimination result, and the second state in which the specific discrimination result is more likely to be compared to the first state Since and are configured to be at least determinable by the state determining means, the second state facilitates the privilege game to be executed again within a short period after the end of the previous privilege game. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to be in the second state, so that the player can play the game while expecting the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B2, the state determining means compares the first state with the second state as the state after the privilege game is finished when the privilege game is executed in the second state. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being easy to determine.

  According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the following effect is achieved. That is, as compared with the first state, when the privilege game is executed in the second state, the second state is more easily determined by the state determining means as a state after the privilege game is finished, Once in the second state, it becomes easy for the state determining means to continuously determine the second state a plurality of times. That is, the bonus game and the second state are easily repeated, so that the game can be played in the expectation of the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a game ball that can enter a game ball during execution of the privilege game and a variable ball means arranged inside the variable ball means, and the game ball that entered the variable ball means, First distribution area that can enter a ball, a second ball area different from the first ball area, and a game ball that has entered the variable ball means to the first ball area. As a distribution pattern that can be varied between a state and a second distribution state that is distributed to the second entry area, and a distribution pattern that determines one distribution pattern from among a plurality of distribution patterns that are determined in advance as the distribution pattern of the distribution means. The distribution pattern includes a determination means and a distribution control means for controlling the distribution pattern to be variable according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means. Compared to the first state, the determining means makes it easier to set a distribution pattern in which the game ball is likely to enter the first entry area when the privilege game is executed in the second state. The game machine B4 is characterized in that the state determining means sets the second state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entry area.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are provided inside the variable ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the privilege game. The distribution means is variable between a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are allocated to the first entrance area and a second allocation state in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area. As the distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined by the distribution pattern determination means from among a plurality of predetermined distribution patterns. According to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means, the distribution control means controls the distribution means to be variable. Compared to the first state, when the privilege game is executed in the second state, the distribution pattern setting means easily sets the distribution pattern in which the game balls are likely to enter the first entry area. The second state is set by the state determining means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry area.

  As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed according to the distribution pattern set in the distribution means, so that the distribution pattern to be set can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the distribution means switches between the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a predetermined order while being controlled by the distribution control means so as to vary. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the sorting patterns are configured such that the varying amounts of the sorting means are different from each other.

  According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the distribution unit is configured so as to switch between the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a predetermined order while being controlled to be variable by the distribution control unit. The plurality of distribution patterns are configured so that the variable amounts of the distribution means are different from each other.

  As a result, since the game can be played while the bonus game is being executed by paying attention to the variable amount of the distribution means, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the sorting means is composed of a rotating body having one or a plurality of the first ball entry areas and one or a plurality of the second ball entry areas, and the first entry is made according to a rotational position. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that the entering rate of the game ball to the ball region is different.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the distribution means is composed of a rotating body having one or a plurality of first ball entry areas and one or a plurality of second ball entry areas. . The rotating body is configured so that the probability of entering the game ball into the first entering area differs depending on the rotational position. As a result, the bonus game can be played while paying attention to the rotational position of the rotating body during execution of the bonus game, so that the bonus game is a monotonous game in which the game ball is only aimed at the variable ball entrance means. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B6, the distribution means has a section in which a plurality of the first entry areas are continuously arranged along the rotation direction, and the distribution pattern determination means determines the specific determination in the second state. When the result is obtained, it becomes easier to determine the distribution pattern in which the variable amount of the distribution means corresponds to one entry area, as compared with the first state. .

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are produced. That is, the distribution unit is provided with a section in which the plurality of first ball entry areas are continuously arranged along the rotation direction. When the specific determination result is obtained in the second state, the distribution pattern determining unit can more easily determine the distribution pattern in which the variable amount of the distribution unit corresponds to one entry area, as compared with the first state.

  As a result, when the second state is achieved in the section in which the first entry areas are continuously arranged, it becomes easier to enter the first entry area continuously in the subsequent bonus game. Therefore, the second game state, which is advantageous to the player, can be easily continued, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distribution pattern determination means, when compared with the second state, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first state, the rotational position at the start of variable and the rotation at the time of variable end. A gaming machine B8, which facilitates setting of the distribution pattern whose position matches.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6 or B7, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first state as compared with the second state, the rotational position at the time of the variable start and the variable position at the time of the variable end. Since it becomes easy for the distribution pattern determination means to determine a distribution pattern that matches the rotation position of the above, in the first state, even if a specific determination result is obtained, it is difficult to obtain the second state. That is, since the first state is likely to continue, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to be too high.

<Characteristic C group> (Variable number of probability variation loops according to jackpot type at probability variation entry)
Discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player on the basis of the specific discrimination result by the discriminating means and the privilege game execution thereof. As the privilege game executed by the means, a type selecting means for selecting one type from a plurality of types of the privilege games set in advance and a game state after the execution of the privilege game is finished, a first game state, , A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state advantageous to the player as compared with the first game state, and when the privilege game is executed, based on the type of the privilege game executed. In the setting by the game state setting means executed thereafter, the first state in which the second game state is continuously set over the first number of times of the privilege game, and the first number of times Many Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it comprises at least settable state setting means and a second state in which the two consecutive times the second game condition is set.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the start winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. Among such conventional type gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that is provided with a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player after winning, as a privilege for winning. In the probability variation state, the lottery probability of winning is higher than usual, so that the winning is likely to continue for a short period. Therefore, by making the player expect that the winning and the probability change state are repeated, the player's interest is improved. Further, some gaming machines equipped with a probability variation state limit the number of consecutive probability variation states (perform probability variation limit control) to suppress gambling (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014). -036729).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the number of consecutive times that the probability variation limit control is performed is fixed, there is a case where it can be known from the number of times the probability variation state continues that the probability variation state ends at the next hit. However, there is a possibility that the interest of the player in the game cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the determination means executes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the special determination result is obtained by the determination means, so that a bonus game advantageous to the player is provided. It is executed by the privilege game executing means. As the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type is selected by the type selecting means from a plurality of predetermined types of privilege games. As the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, the first game state and the second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the first game state are set by the game state setting means. When the privilege game is executed, based on the type of the privilege game executed, the second state is continuously set for the first number of privilege games by the setting by the game state setting means executed thereafter. The state setting means can set the first state in which the state is set and the second state in which the second game state is set continuously for the second number of times larger than the first number.

  As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how continuous the second game state is. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the second game state is set in each privilege game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the state setting means sets a third state in which the first game state is easily set in comparison with the second game state by the game state setting means based on the type of the privilege game executed. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being settable.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, based on the type of privilege game executed, the first gaming state is easily set by the gaming state setting means as compared with the second gaming state. Since the state is set by the state setting means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous because only the first state or the second state is set.

  When the first state or the second state is set in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the number of times corresponding to the set state is set until the second game state is continuously set. A gaming machine C3, characterized by comprising avoiding means for avoiding the setting of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the first state or the second state is set, the number of times of the second gaming state corresponding to the set state is increased. Since the setting of the first game state is avoided by the avoiding means until it is continuously set, when the first state or the second state is set, a corresponding number of times of the second game state The effect is that it can be set reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a variable ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter during execution of the privilege game and a variable ball entering means arranged inside the variable ball entering means and entering the variable ball entering means. A first ball entering area into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering area different from the first ball entering area, and a game ball entering the variable ball entering means are distributed to the first ball entering area. As a distribution means which can be varied between a first distribution state and a second distribution state in which the second distribution area is distributed and a distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined from a plurality of predetermined distribution patterns. And a distribution control means for controlling the distribution pattern to be variable according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means. The pattern determining means determines a distribution pattern in which a game ball easily enters the first ball entry area when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, as compared to the first game state. The game state setting means is for setting the second game state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entry area, the gaming machine C4. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following advantages are produced. That is, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are arranged inside the variable ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the bonus game. The distribution means is variable between a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are allocated to the first entrance area and a second allocation state in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area. As a distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined from the plurality of predetermined distribution patterns by the distribution pattern determination means, and the distribution means is varied according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means. It is controlled by the control means. Compared to the first game state, when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, the distribution pattern determining means is more likely to determine the distribution pattern in which the game balls are likely to enter the first ball entry area. The second game state is set by the game state setting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry area.

  As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed according to the distribution pattern set in the distribution means, so that the distribution pattern to be set can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the distribution means switches between the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a predetermined order while being controlled by the distribution control means to be variable. The gaming machine C5, wherein the sorting patterns are configured such that the varying amounts of the sorting means are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the distribution unit is configured to switch between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in accordance with a predetermined order while being controlled to be variable by the distribution control unit. The plurality of distribution patterns are configured so that the variable amounts of the distribution means are different from each other.

  With this, during the execution of the privilege game, the variable amount of the sorting means can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the privilege game from becoming a monotonous game in which the game ball is only aimed at the variable ball entering means.

  In the gaming machine C5, the distribution means has a section in which the first distribution state is continuous by being variable, and a section in which the second distribution state is continuous, and is the most of the plurality of distribution patterns. The gaming machine C6, wherein the sorting pattern with a small variable amount of the sorting means is a variable amount in which the state of the sorting means is switched once.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5. That is, the distribution means is provided with a section in which the first distribution state is continuous and a section in which the second distribution state is continuous by being variable. Among the plurality of distribution patterns, the distribution pattern with the smallest variable amount of the distributing means is composed of the variable amount that the state of the distributing means is switched once.

  Accordingly, once the game balls can be entered into the first entry area in the first distribution state, the first distribution state can be easily set continuously. That is, it becomes easy to continuously set the second game state. Therefore, the merit of entering the second game state can be further increased, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C6, the distribution pattern determination means makes it easier to determine the distribution pattern having a large variable amount when the privilege game is executed in the first game state, as compared with the second game state. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, when the privilege game is executed in the first gaming state as compared with the second gaming state, the sorting pattern having a large variable amount is the sorting pattern determining means. Since it is easy to be determined by, in the first game state, it becomes easy to exit the section in which the second distribution state is continuous with a small number of executions of the privilege game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, from continuing for a long time, and thus it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from decreasing.

  In the gaming machine C7, the state setting means makes it easier to set the first state as the variable amount of the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means increases.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the larger the variable amount of the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means, the easier the first state is set by the state setting means. When a distribution pattern with a large variable amount is set in the state, the second distribution state is likely to occur, while the number of consecutive second game states decreases even when the second game state is entered. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessive advantage for the player.

  The gaming machine Z1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
650 Second variable winning device (variable winning means)
6610 Sorting rotator (sorting means)
6610a, 6610b Normal distribution part (a part of the second entrance area)
6610c, 6610d, 6610e Probability variation distribution unit (a part of the first entrance area)
671 Positive change entrance (part of the first entrance area)
672, 673 Normal entrance (part of the second entrance area)
S219 privilege game execution means S305 discrimination means S1105 distribution pattern determination means S1106 distribution control means, state setting means S1203 part of the game state setting means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

The gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, when the start winning opening lottery results performed based on the winning of the game balls to become the particular lottery result, those transitions to favorable contact state to the player is there. Such in Yu technique machine, for example, as the state per are those benefits to be awarded to a player is the different types are provided. In this way, when the winning state is reached, the player's interest is improved by expecting a type to which more benefits are given .

JP, 2003-320110, A

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there may not be able to sufficiently improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the game ball can enter the ball entering means, the determination to perform a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the ball entering means Means, a first variable state in which the game ball can enter, and a variable ball entering means that can be changed into a second variable state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable state, and the determining means. Based on the determination result being a specific determination result, the variable game executing means executes a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second variable state to the first variable state, And a first entrance area which is arranged inside the variable entrance means and which can enter the game ball entering the variable entrance means, and a first entrance area which is different from the first entrance area. Specific benefits based on 2 ball entry areas and game balls entering the first entry area A privilege assigning means for granting, a first allocation state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are allocated to the first entrance area, and a second allocation status in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area, To the variable means, the first variable control means for changing the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the variable game, and based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. Second variable control means for varying the variable ball entering means with any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern, As a type of variable game, a type determining means for determining one type of variable game from a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type, and a predetermined type. Specific settings Based on the establishment of, the game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a specific game state, and the first variable control means, at least the specific game state When the variable game of the first type is executed during, the variable means is changed in a common variable pattern, and the game machine is the first type of the variable game executed last time. Depending on whether it is the type or the second type, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry area in the variable game of the first type executed during the specific game state. Saga Ru der those configured so as to variably.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a ball-entering means into which the game ball can enter, a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball-entering means, and a game ball. Is a variable variable entrance means that can be changed between a first variable state in which the ball can enter and a second variable state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable state, and the determination result of the determination means is specific. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second variable state to the first variable state based on the determination result, A first ball entry area, which is arranged inside the variable ball entry means and in which the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means can enter, and a second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area. , Awarding for awarding a specific award based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entering area It is possible to change between a step, a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable ball entry means are distributed to the first ball entry area, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second ball entry area. The variable means, the first variable control means for changing the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the satisfaction of the specific condition during the execution of the variable game, and the variable based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. Second variable control means for changing the ball entering means by any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern, and the type of the variable game. As a type determination means for determining one variable game type from a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type, and a predetermined specific setting condition. Based on the establishment of A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a specific gaming state; and the first variable control means at least during the particular gaming state. When a variable game of a type is executed, the variable means is changed in a common variable pattern, and the gaming machine is a case where the type of the variable game executed last time is the first type, Depending on the case of the second type, the ease with which a game ball can enter the first ball entry area in the variable game of the first type executed during the specific game state can be changed. It is composed of .

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a second variable winning device. (A) is a front perspective view of a distribution rotator, and (b) is a sectional view of a second variable winning device. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) shows the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first embodiment in the first embodiment. It is the mimetic diagram which showed typically correspondence relation between the hit classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol, (c) shows typically the correspondence relation between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the variation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the variation pattern table for big hits typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the rotating body pattern table typically. It is a timing chart showing the correspondence between the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening and the movement of the guide member, which is set according to the jackpot type. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the state of a specific winning a prize mouth, a guide member, and a distribution rotator when it became the big hit A. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the state of a specific winning a prize mouth, a guide member, and a distribution rotator when it became the big hit B. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the state of a specific winning a prize mouth, a guide member, and a distribution rotator when it became the jackpot C. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the state of a specific winning a prize mouth, a guide member, and a distribution rotator when it became the big hit D. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the back surface type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the low certainty time selection table which comprises the back surface type selection table. is there. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the probability variation time selection table which comprises a back surface type selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the back image change processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 7 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a front perspective view of a distribution rotor according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the distribution rotor according to the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a big hit in 2nd Embodiment, and arrangement | positioning of distribution rotor. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of continuous probability change states and the number of continuous probability change states. It is the figure which showed the time change of the opening pattern of the 2nd specific winning opening set according to the jackpot type. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the probability change time selection table which comprises the back surface type selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side where the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect contents of super reach.

  The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, the "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", " There are 5 stages, "Sky Stage" and "Island Stage". Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect that are performed in association with the entrance (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, which will be described later, are themes given to the respective stages. It is designed to be tailored to. Whether or not to change the stage is drawn at the start of the variable effect. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach effect is started, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for the effect mode of the super reach during normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. To be The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (second entrance). Ordinary symbols (second symbol) are drawn by lot when passing through the mouth 67. In the lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 1) performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the jackpot type is also determined. In addition, even in the special symbol lottery (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed for the entry into the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit by the same determination method as the lottery of the special symbol 1 A decision is made. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2, a big hit type different from the lottery of the special symbol 1 is determined (see FIG. 10 (b)). When the special symbol jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a (the second specific winning opening 650a only in the 15th round only) that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapse). Or until 10 balls are won), and the opening is repeated 15 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of winning balls than normal is paid out. As the jackpot type of special symbols, four types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot D" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as a value added after the jackpot finishes, on a game according to these jackpot types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 60 seconds) elapses, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is up to 4 times for each entrance. It is reserved until, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. , The variable display according to the lottery is started. The first specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed in the special gaming state in the 1st to 14th rounds, is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64. Therefore, during the 1st to 14th rounds of the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it win the first specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It becomes easy. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is started. It

  As described above, four types of "big hit A" to "big hit D" are provided as special jackpot types. In any of the cases of “big hit A” to “big hit D”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15R big hit), and then the added value after the big hit ends is given. More specifically, in the jackpot (special game state), the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a is a probability variation entry opening 671 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 (FIG. 5 (b)). By referencing), the state changes to the special symbol probability change state. That is, as an added value after the jackpot, until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the change of the special symbol), and normally. The design shifts to a time saving state. On the other hand, when the ball does not enter the certainty variation ball entrance 671 by the time the jackpot (special game state) ends, no additional value is given after the jackpot ends. That is, the state shifts to a normal state (a low probability state of the special symbol, and a normal state of the normal symbol).

  "High probability state of the special symbol" means a state where the jackpot probability of the special symbol has increased, a so-called special variation state of the special symbol (during the variation of the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (15R jackpot) It is a game state that is easy to play. On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). Further, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (during the time saving of the ordinary symbol) means that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the ball is easy to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal symbol" is called "normal state of normal symbol", this is the normal state where the probability of hitting a normal symbol is normal (that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during the time saving). Indicates that.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state (that is, when the ball enters the probability variation entrance ball 671 during the big hit), the special symbol is drawn. Although it is configured that the probability change state of the special symbol continues until the end of 100 times, it is not limited to this and the number of times may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, from the end of the special game state until the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times, the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state) is given, and after the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times May be configured to be set to a low probability state of a special symbol. Further, it is not necessary to limit the number of times that the special symbol is in the probability changing state, and for example, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol is configured to be in a time saving state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot is finished, but the time saving period of the ordinary symbol is not limited to 100 times, and is arbitrary. May be specified.

  The first entrance 64 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80. On the other hand, the second entrance 640 is arranged on the right side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 and a second entrance A switch (not shown) is turned on, a lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first entrance opening switch or the second entrance opening switch, and a display according to the result of the drawing It is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. . In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (15 round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for the predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 14 times (14 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a, and a large opening solenoid (for opening / closing the front side around the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state.

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided below the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally elongated rectangular second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion of an upper surface thereof. It is provided. This 2nd specific winning a prize mouth 650a is opened and closed in the 15th round of the big hit with the opening pattern which is decided beforehand corresponding to the big hit type (see FIG. 13).

  Inside the second variable winning device 650, a plurality of ball entrances through which balls can enter are provided. Specifically, by entering the ball during the jackpot, the probability variation ball entrance 671 to which the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is finished, and the entered ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Yes (the probability that the special symbol is not changed even if the ball enters) is normally provided. The ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 enters (is distributed to) one of these three entrances (probably variable entrance 671, normal entrances 672, 673). Is discharged to. That is, all the balls that have not entered the probability variation entrance 671 enter the normal entrance 672 or 673 and are discharged to the outside. If the ball entered at least once in the probability variation entrance ball 671 in 1 jackpot, after the jackpot, the probability of the special symbol is changed until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol Is given. On the other hand, in the case of not having entered the probability variation entrance ball 671 even once in one jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot is completed (shifts to the normal state).

  A configuration for distributing the balls by the second variable winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the second variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the second variable winning device 650 is configured in the shape of a box having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a space inside. A second specific winning port 650a is provided on the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 as an opening communicating with the internal space of the second variable winning device 650. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally closed by a closing plate 650b. The closing plate 650b is driven by a solenoid and projects toward the front side in the front view to close the second specific winning port 650a, and when retracted into the back side in the front view, the second specific winning port 650a. It is configured so that it can be changed to an immersion position that opens.

  When the closing plate 650b is arranged at the projecting position, the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 and the closing plate 650b are smoothly communicated with each other, so that the ball reaching the right side of the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 is in front. It can be made to flow to the left direction. On the other hand, when the closing plate 650b is placed in the immersive position, the second specific winning port 650a is in an open state, so that the ball that has reached the upper right side of the second variable winning device 650 is the second specific winning port 650a. Can be made to flow into the inside of the second variable winning device 650.

  Inside the second variable winning device 650, downstream of the second specific winning port 650a, a distribution component 651 for distributing the sphere to either the normal channel 652 or the probability variation channel 653 is provided. . The distribution component 651 can be switched between a projecting state in which the guiding member 651a projects leftward in front view and a projecting state in which the guiding member 651a is recessed inside the distribution compound 651. When the distribution combination object 651 is in the immersive state, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can be made to flow down to the normal flow path 652 arranged immediately below the second specific winning opening 650a. . On the other hand, when the distribution component 651 is in the protruding state, the guide member 651a closes the upper surface side of the normal flow path 652, so that the ball entering the second specific winning port 650a flows down to the normal flow path 652. Can not be. In the projecting state, the guide member 651a is inclined downward to the lower left when viewed from the front, so the ball that has entered the second specific winning port 650a rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 651a and is viewed from the front. It flows down to the probability variation channel 653 provided on the left side. The sphere that has flowed down the probability variation channel 653 enters the probability variation inlet port 671 downstream thereof. Therefore, since the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is over, the player can be pleased.

  The distribution accessory 652 is kept in an immersive state in a normal time (a state other than a big hit). In addition, when it becomes a big hit, it is set to the protruding state 2 seconds after the start of the 15th round. This protruding state is maintained until the end of the 15th round, and when the 15th round is completed, the immersive state is set again. That is, if the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning port 650a after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round, the projecting member 651a guides the ball to the probability variation channel 653. By entering the ball into the probability variation ball opening 671, it is possible to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Therefore, in the 15th round, it is possible to make a big-hit game while paying attention to whether or not the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a after 2 seconds or more has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming a monotonous game just to obtain a prize ball, and to pay attention to the timing at which the ball enters the second specific winning port 650a, so that the jackpot game is monotonous. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Downstream of the normal flow path 652, a distribution rotator 661 for allocating the sphere to either the probability variation entrance 672 or the normal entrance 672 or 673 is arranged. The distribution rotator 661 is configured to be able to rotate clockwise with the shaft 661e as a rotation axis. The distribution rotator 661 is provided with four openings into which spheres flowing down the normal flow path 652 can enter. Of the four openings, the balls that have entered the normal distribution unit 661a and the normal distribution unit 661b are distributed to either the normal entrance port 672 or the normal entrance port 673. On the other hand, of the four openings, the probability variation distribution portion 661c and the probability variation distribution portion 661d cause the entered ball to flow down to the back surface side flow passage 654 provided on the back surface side of the distribution rotation body 661. As a result, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the certainty variation ball inlet 671 arranged downstream of the back surface side channel 654.

  Next, details of the distribution rotator 661 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a front perspective view of the distribution rotator 661. As shown in FIG. 5A, the distribution rotator 661 has a substantially columnar shape and is rotatable about a shaft 661e as a rotation axis. The shaft 661e is connected to a motor (not shown), and the operation of the motor is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. More specifically, in the 15th round of the jackpot, the MPU 201 sets a rotating operation having a different operation pattern for each jackpot type. The operation pattern for each jackpot type is defined in advance in the rotating body pattern table 202e (see FIG. 12) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the distribution rotator 661 is provided with four distribution units (openings), which are the normal distribution units 661a and 661b and the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d. Of these, the normal distribution units 661a and 661b communicate with each other. A back wall 661f is provided on the back side of the communicating portion to prevent the ball from coming off to the back side of the distribution rotator 661. As a result, the ball that has entered the one opening can be surely rolled on the inclined surface 661g and discharged from the other opening. The discharged balls are distributed to either the normal ball entrance 672 or the normal ball entrance 673 depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 as described above.

  On the other hand, unlike the normal distribution units 661a and 661b, the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d penetrate to the rear surface side of the distribution rotating body 661. Therefore, the entered ball can be advanced to the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661. The sphere that has traveled to the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661 flows down through the rear surface flow path 654 provided on the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661 and enters the positive variation ball opening 671. Therefore, if the sphere can reach the distribution rotator 661 with one of the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d arranged on the upper side of the distribution rotator 661, the special symbol will be drawn after the jackpot is over. Transition to the probable state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 650 when viewed from the front. In this example, the case where the normal distribution unit 661b of the distribution rotator 661 is at the rotation position arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 is shown. This rotation position is the initial arrangement of the distribution rotator 661, and is set to the initial arrangement each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed. When the sphere flows down the normal flow path 652 at this rotational position, the sphere enters the normal distribution unit 661b. Then, the spheres are discharged from the normal distribution unit 661a via the inclined surface 661g and proceed to the left channel 655 provided on the left side in front view with respect to the distribution rotating body 661. The ball that has proceeded to the left channel 655 enters a normal ball inlet 672 provided on the downstream side thereof and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the rotation position in FIG. 5B, the normal distribution unit 661 a is set to the rotation position arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the normal flow path 652 enters the normal distribution unit 661a. The presence of the back wall 661f hinders (limits) the movement of the ball entering the normal distribution unit 661a toward the rear side of the distribution rotating body 661, and therefore the normal distribution is performed via the inclined surface 661g. It is discharged from the dividing portion 661b. In a state in which the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the rotation position in FIG. 5B, the normal distribution unit 661b is arranged on the right side of the distribution rotator 661 when viewed from the front, and thus the sphere moves It is discharged to the left side of the minute rotating body 661. That is, the ball travels through the right channel 656 provided on the right side of the distribution rotor 661 and enters the normal ball entrance 673.

  When the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise from the rotation position in FIG. 5B, the probability variation distribution unit 661d is located at the rotation position immediately below the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the normal flow path 652 enters the probability variation distribution unit 661d. The sphere that has entered the probability variation distribution unit 661d is guided from the probability variation distribution unit 661d to the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661 and proceeds to the rear flow path 654. Then, it enters the certainty variation ball inlet 671 provided on the downstream side of the back flow path 654. The ball enters the probability variation entrance ball opening 671 to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over.

  When the distribution rotator 661 is rotated clockwise by 270 degrees from the rotation position in FIG. 5B, the positive variation distribution unit 661c is located at a position below the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the normal flow path 652 enters the probability variation distribution unit 661c. The sphere entering the probability variation distribution unit 661c is guided from the probability variation distribution unit 661c to the rear surface side of the distribution rotator 661 and proceeds to the back flow path 654. Then, it enters the certainty variation ball inlet 671 provided on the downstream side of the back flow path 654. The ball enters the probability variation entrance ball opening 671 to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over.

  In this way, the ball entering the ball flowing down the normal flow path 652 is different depending on the arrangement (rotational position) of the distribution rotator 661. Can attract the attention of. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot can be further improved.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening which is opened and closed separately from the second specific winning opening 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 lights up, the first specifying The winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port are triggered by the ball winning in the first specific winning port 65a while the first specific winning port 65a is opened. A game state in which a large opening provided separately from 650a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time may be formed as a special game state.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the special symbol lottery performed with the entry (starting winning) into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is being executed by a lighting state. By performing a variable display, as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends, the special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, the first entrance 64, and the second entrance The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the mouth 640, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is reserved up to 4 times for each type of ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of special symbols) with few LEDs. Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and when it is a big hit, a special according to the big hit type (big hit A to D). A design (first design) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. To be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 12.1-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 6B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with an attached pattern imitating a character such as planer, furoshiki, helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display 81 (first symbol display 37), The number of entered balls is reserved up to 4 times for each entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserve sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it is indicated that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the through gate 67 is being performed, or after the variation ends. As a stop symbol, the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol is displayed. Done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. The number of times the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reserve lamp 84. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to four maximum holding balls as in the case of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but three times or less, or five. The number of times may be set more than once (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern table 202d and a rotating body pattern table 202e are stored at least.

  The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 10A) is a data table that stores a jackpot determination value of a first winning random number counter C1 described later. Specifically, as the big hit determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, only "0" is defined, and as the big hit determination value in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol, 10 of "1 to 10" The judgment value is specified. If the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is equal to any of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a (see FIG. 10 (a)), the special symbol It is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the judgment of the first hit type counter C2. Values are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 69" in association with "big hit A". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit A" is 70, so "big hit A" is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big hit. The ratio is 70% (70/100).

  Further, "big hit B" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "70 to 99". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit B" is 30, so "big hit B" is determined when the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery. The ratio is 30% (30/100). Therefore, the proportion of the “big hit B” determined is lower than that of the “big hit A”.

  The “big hit A” and the “big hit B” have different operation patterns of the opening / closing operation of the closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650 and the rotating operation of the distribution rotator 661. In the case of "big hit A", the closing plate 650c is changed to the retracted position for 1 second from the start of the 15th round, and the ball can enter (easy) the second specific winning opening 650a. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", a ball can enter (easy) into the second specific winning opening 650a for a maximum of 30 seconds from the start of the 15th round. As described above, the guide member 651a projects 2 seconds after the start of the 15th round (the sphere can flow down to the probability variation channel 653), so that the "big hit B" allows the ball to flow down to the probability variation channel 653. Is possible (easy). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit A", the second specific winning port 650a becomes incapable of entering (difficult) before the guide member 651a projects, so that the ball can be made to flow down to the probability variation channel 653. It will be difficult. Although details will be described later in the description of the rotating body pattern table 202e (see FIG. 12), when the “big hit A” occurs, the distribution rotor 661 is arranged in a period in which a ball can enter. Basically, the normal distribution unit 661a is at the rotational position (position shown in FIG. 5B) immediately below the normal flow channel 652. Therefore, compared to the "big hit B", since the "big hit A" is less likely to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol after the big hit, it is disadvantageous to the player.

  For the special symbol 2, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 69" in association with "big hit C". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit C" is 70, so "big hit C" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1. The ratio is 70% (70/100). Further, "big hit D" is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is a "big hit D" is 30, so "big hit D" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 30% (30/100). Therefore, the proportion of the “big hit D” determined is lower than that of the “big hit C”.

  In the “big hit C”, the closing plate 650b performs the same operation as in the “big hit A”. That is, the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a only during a period (1 second from the start of the 15th round) in which it is difficult to flow into the probability variation channel 653. On the other hand, the “big hit D” performs the same operation as the “big hit B”. That is, a ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a even during a period in which it is easy to flow into the probability variation channel 653 (two seconds after the start of 15 rounds).

  On the other hand, the operation pattern of the distribution rotor 661 in the 15th round of “big hit C” is different from that of “big hit A”. In addition, the operation pattern of the distribution rotor 661 in the 15th round of "big hit D" is also different from "big hit B". Although details will be described later in the description of the rotary body pattern table 202e (see FIG. 12), in the “big hit C”, the normal distribution unit 661a, the normal distribution unit 661a, and the normal distribution unit 661a are arranged according to the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 661 at the start of the big hit. There is a possibility of entering the ball in both the minute portion 661b and the probability variation distribution portions 661c and 661d. Therefore, it is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A".

  Here, the correspondence relationship between the opening / closing pattern of the closing plate 650b and the arrangement of the guide member 651a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the timewise change of the opening / closing operation of the closing plate 650b in the 15th round of “big hit A, C”, and the graph of the interruption in FIG. 13 is the induction in the 15th round of big hit. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a time change of the state of the member 651a, and the lower graph of FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a time change of the opening / closing operation of the closing plate 650b in the 15th round of “big hit B, D”.

  As shown in the graph on the upper side of FIG. 13, in “big hit A, C”, the closing plate 650b is changed to the retracted position for 1 second from the start of the 15th round, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. Then, after 1 second has passed, the closing plate 650b is changed to the projecting position and the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Therefore, the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a only for 1 second from the start of the 15th round.

  On the other hand, as shown in the middle graph of FIG. 13, the guide member 651a is in the immersed state (the state where the sphere is guided to the normal flow path 652) for 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round, and thereafter, The guide member 651a is in a protruding state until the end of the 15th round. That is, since the guiding member 651a is always immersed for 1 second from the start of the 15th round, in the "big hit A, C", the ball entering the second specific winning port 650a enters the normal flow path 652. And flows down.

  Further, as shown in the lower graph of FIG. 13, in the “big hit B, D”, the closing plate 650b is changed to the retracted position from the start to the end of the 15th round, and the second specific winning opening 650a is in the open state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a during the period in which the guiding member 651a is in the protruding state (2 seconds after the start of 15 rounds). Therefore, in "big hit B, D", the ball flows down to the probability variation channel 653 by causing the ball to enter the second specific winning port 650a after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing operation of the closing plate 651b (the opening pattern of the second specific winning port 650a) is made different depending on the type of jackpot. As a result, the degree of expectation of shifting to the specially changed state of the special symbol is made different. As a result, it is possible to play the big hit game by paying attention to the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 10 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is stipulated as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 10 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, as a judgment value for hitting the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined (see FIG. 10 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to. , Ordinarily, it is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  The rotating body pattern table 202e is a data table that defines an operation pattern of the rotating operation of the distribution rotating body 661 in the 15th round of the big hit, for each big hit type. At the 15th round of the jackpot, the operation pattern corresponding to the jackpot type of this time is read out from the rotating body pattern table 202e and set as the operation of the sorting rotor 661 (see S1106 in FIG. 38).

  Details of the rotary body pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rotating body pattern table 202e. As shown in FIG. 12, in the “big hit A”, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise at the start of the 15th round. After that, the rotation operation is stopped until 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 15th round. Then, after the lapse of 3 seconds, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated clockwise by 270 degrees, and then the operation is stopped until the end of 15 rounds.

  As described above, in the "big hit A", the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a only for 1 second from the start of the 15th round. Therefore, in the case of entering the second specific winning opening 650a in the "big hit A", the distribution rotator 661 reaches the distribution rotator 661 during a period in which the distribution rotator 661 is in the rotation position rotated by 90 degrees.

  As described above, the initial arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 is such that the normal distribution unit 661b is directly below the normal flow path 652. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the low probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 2. That is, since the lottery for the special symbol 1 is likely to be executed, it is easy to determine the “big hit A” or the “big hit B” when the big hit occurs. Therefore, in many cases where the “big hit A” occurs, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the initial position (the normal distribution unit 661a is directly below the normal flow path 652). The sphere reaches the distribution rotator 661 by the arrangement. Therefore, the ball that has entered the normal distribution unit 661a enters the normal entrance 673 through the normal distribution unit 661b (it is difficult to enter the probability variation entrance 671), so the big hit ends. After that, it becomes difficult to give a specially changed state of special symbols. Further, in the “big hit A”, the distribution rotator 661 rotates 360 degrees (90 degrees +270 degrees) in total. That is, since the distribution rotator 661 makes one rotation, when the “big hit A” occurs in the initial placement state, the initial placement is performed again after the big hit ends. Therefore, if the "big hit A" continues in the initial arrangement, it is not possible for the player to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  In the “big hit B”, as shown in FIG. 12, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise at the start of the 15th round. After that, the rotation operation is stopped until 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 15th round. Then, after the lapse of 3 seconds, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise and then stopped until the 15th round is completed. As described above, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is easy to be executed in the initial placement, so that the "big hit B", which is one of the jackpot types selected in the case where the lottery for the special symbol 1 is a big hit, is also performed in the initial placement. It will be easier to win. Therefore, at the end of the "big hit B", the distribution rotor 661 is rotated by 180 degrees (90 degrees + 90 degrees) from the initial arrangement. That is, the probability variation distribution unit 661c is placed directly below the normal flow path 652.

  In the “big hit C”, as shown in FIG. 12, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise at the start of the 15th round. After that, the distribution rotor 661 is stopped until the 15th round is completed. The arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 is maintained until the next big hit.

  In the “big hit D”, as shown in FIG. 12, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise at the start of the 15th round. After that, the rotation operation is stopped until 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 15th round. Then, after the lapse of 3 seconds, the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise and then stopped until the 15th round is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 17, the state of the second variable winning a prize device 650 (the state of the second specific winning port 650a, the guiding member 651a, and the distribution rotator 661) in each jackpot type is the 15th round. A more specific description will be given of how it changes in.

  FIG. 14: is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd variable winning device 650 in the 15th round of "big hit A". As shown in FIG. 14, in the 15th round of the “big jackpot A”, first, the second specific winning port 650a is set to the open state, and the distribution rotator 661 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees. (See FIG. 14 (a)). In addition, the path length of the normal flow path 652 is a path length at which the rotation operation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is completed before the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a reaches the distribution rotator 661. Has become. Therefore, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can be reliably introduced into the distribution unit at the position rotated by 90 degrees. In the example of FIG. 14, since the initial arrangement is shown at the start of the jackpot, the distribution unit that allows the balls to enter when the ball is rotated 90 degrees enters the normal distribution unit 661a. . Therefore, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a finally enters the normal entrance 673 (see FIG. 14A).

  After that, after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the guide member 651a is projected (see FIG. 14 (b)). Therefore, since the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 650a with the guiding member 651a protruding, it is difficult for the "big hit A" to flow the ball down to the probability variation channel 653. Then, after the guiding member 651a is retracted at the end of the 15th round, the distribution rotor 661 is rotated by 270 degrees (see FIG. 14C). That is, the distribution rotor 661 returns to the arrangement at the start of the big hit. Therefore, if the distribution rotor 661 is initially placed (see FIG. 5 (b)) and continues to win the “big hit A”, the second specific winning opening 650a is obtained in each 15 rounds of the “big hit A”. Since the ball that has entered to enter the normal entrance 673 through the normal distribution unit 661a, it is not possible to make a transition to a state in which the special symbol is changed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  FIG. 15: is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd variable winning device 650 in the 15th round of "big hit B". Since the “big hit B” is basically easy to win when the distribution rotor 661 is in the initial arrangement, the example of FIG. 15 illustrates the case where the distribution rotor 661 is in the initial arrangement at the start of the jackpot. explain.

  In the 15th round of “big hit B”, as with “big hit A”, first, the second specific winning port 650a is set to the open state, and the distribution rotor 661 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees. (See FIG. 15A). That is, the normal distribution unit 661a is arranged immediately below the normal flow channel 652. Therefore, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in this state finally enters the normal winning opening 673 (see FIG. 15A).

  After that, the guide member 651a is projected 2 seconds after the start of the 15th round with the second specific winning opening 650a kept open (see FIG. 15B). Therefore, after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round, it becomes possible to enter the ball into the second specific winning port 650a with the guiding member 651a protruding, so that in the "big hit B", the positive variation current The sphere can be made to flow down into the path 653 (see FIG. 15 (b)). That is, it is possible to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol after the big hit.

  Then, when the 15th round is completed, the second specific winning port 650a is closed and the guiding member 651a is immersed at the end of the 15th round. After that, the distribution rotator 661 is rotated by 90 degrees (see FIG. 15C). That is, the probability variation distribution portion 661d of the distribution rotator 661 is placed directly below the normal flow path 652. Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the “big hit A” to the “big hit D” occur, the distribution rotor 661 is first rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the start of the big hit. 2 It becomes possible to enter the specific winning opening 650a. That is, at the end of the big hit (15 rounds), the sorting parts that are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the sorting parts that are arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 are allowed to enter the next big hit. . Therefore, when the 15th round ends with the probability variation distribution unit 661d of the distribution rotator 661 disposed immediately below the normal flow path 652, the probability variation distribution unit 661c can enter the ball at the next big hit. With the "big hit B", the special symbol can be shifted to the certainty variation state, and the next big jackpot can enter the certainty variation entrance ball 671 regardless of the type of big hit. Therefore, in the case where the distribution rotor 661 is in the initial arrangement, when the "big hit B" is reached, it is possible to make a transition to the probability changing state of the special symbol at least twice consecutively (loop at least twice). , Is extremely advantageous to the player as compared to the “big hit A”.

  FIG. 16: is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd variable winning device 650 in the 15th round of "big hit C". "Big hit C" is one kind of big hit type that is determined when a big hit is obtained by a lottery for special symbols executed based on the entry into the second entrance 640. That is, it becomes easy to be decided in the probability change state of the special symbol (the time saving state of the normal symbol). Therefore, basically, it is determined after the "big hit B" in the normal state or when the probability variation state of the special symbol is continuous (looping). In FIG. 16, the distribution rotor 661 becomes “big hit B” in the state of the initial arrangement, and after transitioning to the special variation state of the special symbol, the case of “big hit C” during the certain variation state is illustrated. ing. That is, at the start of the “big hit C”, the big hit is started in a state where the probability variation distribution unit 661d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652.

  In the 15th round of "big hit C", as with "big hit A, B", first, the second specific winning port 650a is set to the open state, and the distribution rotor 661 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. It is operated (see FIG. 16A). That is, the probability variation distribution unit 661c is placed directly below the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in this state is guided to the rear flow path 654 on the back side of the distribution rotator 661 through the probability distribution distribution unit 661c, and finally the reliable distribution. The ball enters the ball 671 (see FIG. 16A).

  After that, the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, and then the guide member 651a is projected (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, in the “big hit C”, like the “big hit A”, the ball cannot enter the second specific winning port 650a with the guide member 651a protruding. That is, the sphere cannot flow down into the probability variation flow path 653. Then, at the end of the 15th round, the guide member 651a is immersed (see FIG. 16C).

  In this way, in the case of "big hit C", the distribution rotor 661 is changed by 90 degrees (one distribution part) by one big hit. Further, as described above, the “big hit C” has a higher selection rate than the “big hit D” when the big hit is achieved by the lottery of the special symbol 2. Therefore, during the probability variation state of the special symbol, the degree of expectation to be the probability variation state after the next big hit, and the degree of expectation that the probability variation state is continuous are different depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661.

  For example, when the normal distribution unit 661a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 in the probability variation state, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 661d at the next big hit. Regardless of the type of jackpot, it is possible to easily shift to a specially changed state of the special symbol after the next jackpot. Further, the probability variation distribution portions 661c are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the probability variation distribution portion 661d. Therefore, when the next big hit, and the big hit after two times becomes a "big hit C" continuously, it is possible to make the probability variation state of the special symbol continuous for three times (loop three times). Therefore, the arrangement is extremely advantageous for the player.

  Further, when the normal distribution unit 661b is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652, it is possible to enter the normal distribution unit 661a at the next big hit. Therefore, when the “big hit C”, which has a relatively high determination rate, is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball into the certainty change entrance port 671, the certainty change state ends with the next big hit. However, the possibility of shifting to the normal state increases. Therefore, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player.

  Further, when the probability variation distribution unit 661c is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 661d at the next big hit. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to easily enter the probability variation entrance 671 with the next big hit. Therefore, the arrangement is relatively advantageous for the player.

  Furthermore, when the probability variation distribution unit 661d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652, it is possible to enter the normal distribution unit 661a at the next big hit. Therefore, when the “big hit C”, which has a relatively high determination rate, is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball into the certainty change entrance port 671, the certainty change state ends with the next big hit. However, the possibility of shifting to the normal state increases. Therefore, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a state of the second variable winning device 650 in the “big hit D” will be described. FIG. 17: is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 2nd variable winning device 650 when it becomes "big hit D".

  In the 15th round of "big hit B", as with "big hit A to C", first, the second specific winning port 650a is set to the open state, and the distribution rotator 661 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. It is operated (see FIG. 17 (a)). In addition, in this example, since the probability variation distribution unit 661d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 by the rotation operation of 90 degrees, the ball entered into the second specific winning port 650a is moved to the probability variation ball port 671. You can enter the ball.

  After that, the guide member 651a is projected 2 seconds after the start of the 15th round with the second specific winning opening 650a kept open (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round, it becomes possible to enter the ball into the second specific winning port 650a with the guiding member 651a protruding, and thus in the "big hit D", the positive variation current The sphere can be made to flow down into the path 653 (see FIG. 17 (b)).

  Then, when the 15th round is completed, the second specific winning port 650a is closed and the guiding member 651a is immersed at the end of the 15th round. After that, the distribution rotator 661 is rotated 180 degrees (see FIG. 17C). That is, in the example of FIG. 17, the normal distribution unit 661 b of the distribution rotator 661 is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652. As described above, this arrangement is the most advantageous arrangement for the player in the probability variation state (the location in which the probability variation state is likely to loop three times). Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this way, in the case of "big hit D", regardless of the arrangement of the sorting rotor 661, it is possible to easily shift to the probable variation state, and the sorting rotor 661 indicates "big hit C". Are configured to perform different rotation operations (rotation operations in which the total rotation angle is 270 degrees), the number of loops with a certain probability increases or conversely decreases depending on the timing of "big hit D". It may happen.

  For example, in the case where the probability variation distribution unit 661c is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (when the "big hit C" occurs next, it is a disadvantageous arrangement in which the probability variation state is not given), and the "big hit D" occurs, In addition to the probability variation state of the special symbol, the probability variation distribution unit 661d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit. Therefore, in the next big hit, regardless of the big hit type, the ball can enter the probability variation distribution unit 661c for at least 1 second from the start of the 15th round. Therefore, the probability variation state is provided at least twice, including the probability variation state given after the “big hit D”, which can be a very advantageous state for the player.

  On the other hand, for example, in the state in which the normal distribution unit 661b is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (when the probability variation state loops twice when both the next and the big hits after two times are "big hit C"), When the jackpot D "is reached, the normal symbol distribution state is given, but at the end of the jackpot, the normal distribution unit 661a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652. That is, if the proportion selected in the next jackpot is high (70%), "jackpot C", all the balls that have entered the second specific winning port 650a are normally entered from the normal distribution unit 661b. Since the ball enters the ball mouth 672, it becomes a normal state after the big hit. Therefore, the number of loops is lost once (if the "big hit C" continues, the probability variation state loops twice, but the probability variation state ends once), which is disadvantageous to the player. .

  In this way, since the rotation operation of the distribution rotor 661 is different between the “big hit C” and the “big hit D”, depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 at the start of the big hit and the big hit type. , The number of loops in the probability changing state can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played with the expectation that different jackpot types will be obtained depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In the main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 36). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entering ball. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the mouth 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a second The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored at the timing of entering the ball entrance 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, a sphere is common. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the ball entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is the jackpot for the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 10A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and a high probability of a high probability of being a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special The period is a high probability state of the symbol) and for two types, the number of random numbers to be included in each is set differently (see FIG. 10 (a)). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value thereof is set. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is a special symbol big hit time. In this case, the concrete display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Becomes

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is in the first per random number table for low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 10A). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values “1 to 10” are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( (See FIG. 10A). In this way, at a high probability of a special symbol, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “10/300”.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And as shown in FIG.10 (b), it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0-69", the big hit type becomes "big hit A". . When the value is “70 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is selected by lottery and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 69", the big hit type is "big hit C". When the value is “70 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot D”. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hit types (big hits A to D) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "reach out of front and rear" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and back" (for example in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage type depending on the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected, the range of the random number values corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability times. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely missed”. In this table, the "rearward / rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front / rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "rear / rear outreach" or "reach other than front / rear outreach". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is a small probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front / back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front / outside" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-front / rear reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11A) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

  Here, the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 11B) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11C). ) And the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11D) are set at least.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of “0 to 50” is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. The variation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and the variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". MPU201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is off in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. . If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete outlier is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set. Set (Front / Rear Reach, Other Reach Reach).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As for the out-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 149”, and various super-reach various out of the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), "198" is set to various special reach (90 seconds).

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

  FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is missed in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out-of-front and out) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol hold in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 10C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When it matches the value of the random number which is the winning set by the second hit random number table, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table, for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal state of the normal symbol), and for the high probability that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time (of the normal symbol) It is divided into two types, that is, for a period of time saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of which is a big hit is set differently (see FIG. 10C). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (c), at the time of low probability of a normal symbol, there are 15 random number values for winning the regular symbol, and the range thereof is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 16, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/15".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds × 1 time", but is released. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is lit up and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". To be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is released for “1 second × 2 times”, but the release time or The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various flags and counters. Here, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9B, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d. And, special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, normal symbol reservation sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, big hit flag 203i, arrangement storage area 203j, probability variation setting flag 203k, winning number counter 203m, and remaining Ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, round end flag 203q, probability variation valid flag 203r, probability variation valid timer 203s, ball discharge number counter 203t, probability variation passage counter 203u, counter buffer 203y, and others. It has at least a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter The respective values of C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the storage method of the counter value and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding sphere storing area 203b, has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth Area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 03b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the winning order. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas is packed into the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  Special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d, variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize) (third symbol) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first entrance 64, and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 The value is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 29).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 29, S405 in FIG. 31). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next reserved ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to hold, and the display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  Special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, the variable display of the special symbol (the 1st symbol) which is done with the 1st symbol indicator 37 on the basis of the entry to the 2nd entry port 640 (starting winning) (the 3rd symbol) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases. The value is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 29). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S604 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 32).

  When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S605 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S603 of FIG. 33: No). ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It shows that the symbol is a probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability change state of the special symbol is the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the low probability state of the special symbol is the normal state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is also a probability variation state of the special symbol and also indicates that it is a time saving state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, if the probability variation counter 203g value is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol and in the normal state of the normal symbol (the normal state).

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when a ball entering the probability variation entrance ball 671 is detected during the big hit, 100 is set at the end of the big hit (see S1203 in FIG. 39). ), Each time it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the value is subtracted by 1 (see S221 in FIG. 29). The probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 when the next big hit game is started (see S218 in FIG. 29).

  This probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start processing (see S302 in FIG. 30). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S213) is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S213), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, based on the first random number table 202a for high probability, special symbol lottery On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  Further, the probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation process (S508, S514, S519 of FIG. 32). Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the value is 1 or more, based on the second random number table 202c for high probability, the regular symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table 202c for low probability. Further, in the normal symbol variation process, it is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol hits (see S514 and S519 of FIG. 32).

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the jackpot (special game state). If the value of the jackpot flag 203i is ON, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the jackpot is not in jackpot. The jackpot flag 203i becomes a jackpot by a special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1003 in FIG. 37). Further, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1205 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the jackpot flag 203i is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (see S201 in FIG. 29).

  The arrangement storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661. In the arrangement storage area 203j, for example, the arrangement data of any of "00H" to "03H" is stored according to the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661. More specifically, for example, in the initial arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 661b is directly below the normal flow path 652), the arrangement data of "00H" is stored. In addition, at the rotational positions rotated by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees from the initial arrangement, the arrangement data of “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” are stored, respectively. Based on the value stored in the arrangement storage area 203j, the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 can be easily determined. When the value stored in the layout storage area 203j is changed, the state command is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can also accurately grasp the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661.

  The probability variation setting flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state of the special symbol, the ball enters the probability change entrance ball 671 during the jackpot game (the probability change provided at the probability change entrance 671). It is determined whether or not the passage of the switch is detected). When the sphere enters the probability variation ball entrance 671, the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1314 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to off at the end of the big hit. The probability variation setting flag 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the player has entered the probability variation entrance 671 before the power is turned off. The setting flag 203k may be configured to be officially turned on and returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the player has entered the probability variation entrance 671 before power-off can be determined by whether the probability variation passage counter 203u, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) fraud in which only the probability variation setting flag 203k is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. It is possible to prevent giving.

  The number-of-wins counter 203m is the number of game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, , The first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is a counter for counting the number of game balls entered). Specifically, the value is incremented by 1 and updated each time a ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is detected (S1303 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings (value of the winning number counter 203m) and the number of winnings (sphere discharging number counter 203t) of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are accurately changed. After it is determined (S1407 in FIG. 41) whether or not the sum and the passage counter 203u match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. The value of the winning number counter 203m is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it means that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, and the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls inside has elapsed.

  The remaining ball timer 203p, when one preset round is finished and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls won in the device 650 has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are both discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, it is 3 seconds in advance. The corresponding counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203p, the number of winnings and the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 are equal to each other. Whether or not it is done is executed (S1407 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly notify that the ball is clogged inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650.

  If the number of winning coins does not match the number of ejected coins, a dedicated flag is set to ON. The configuration may be such that 203k is not set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

  The round end flag 203q is a flag indicating whether or not one round of the jackpot has ended. If the round end flag 203q is turned on, it means that the so-called ball-stroking period is in progress after the jackpot round is completed. When a ball entering the probability variation ball entrance 671 is detected while the round end flag 203q is on, it is determined that the ball is a regular ball and the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to on. The round end flag 203q is set to ON each time the end condition of each round of jackpots is satisfied (see S1310 in FIG. 40), and the pitching period ends (the probability variation valid timer 203s reaches the upper limit value). In this case, it is set to off (see S1318 in FIG. 40).

  The probability variation valid flag 203r is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the game ball when the game ball enters the probability variation ball inlet 671 after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. is there. When the probability variation valid flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a is less than or equal to the time required to enter the probability variation ball opening 671. ing. That is, the period in which the probability variation valid flag 203r is on indicates that it is a normal period that a ball enters the probability variation entrance port 671.

  The probability variation valid timer 203s is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability variation valid flag 203r is set to ON. The probability variation effective timer 203s can determine (measure) the period required to normally enter the probability variation entrance slot 671 after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a to reach the certainty variation ball opening 671 is 1.5 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.5 seconds, and if the probability variation entry ball 671 is subsequently entered, it is determined to be incorrect and not to pass.

  As a result, in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the player may illegally enter the second specific winning opening 650a to enter the sphere into the certainty variation entrance 671 or below the certain variation entrance 671. Further, it is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the sphere with a piano wire or the like to allow it to pass therethrough, or causing a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The ball discharge number counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the normal winning openings 672 and 673 of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The ball discharge number counter 203t is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of balls won in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 and the number of discharged balls are determined (see FIG. 41). S1407).

  The probability variation passage counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the probability variation entrance port 671 in 15 rounds of the big hit. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged, based on the total of the probability variation passage counter 203u and the above-described ball discharge number counter 203t. The probability variation passage counter 203u is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation passage opening 671 is passed (S1313 in FIG. 40). In addition, after performing the process of determining whether the number of balls won in the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1411 in FIG. 41). The probability variation passage counter 203u is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The counter buffer 203y includes the above-described counters (first random number counter C1, first random type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, variable type counter CS1, second random number counter C4). , A storage area for storing the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 201. The stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, the work area (work area) that stores various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Have

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 35). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning prize. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open / close the mouth 650a and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to them via the input / output port 205. Send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the random number generation IC 800 for effect, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. At least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a back surface type selection table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  The rear surface type selection table 222b is a data table for setting the rear surface type according to the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 and the game state. In the present embodiment, when the variable display is executed, the mode of the variable display is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a, and the rear surface type selection table 222b is referred to to determine whether or not the rear surface type is changed. (See S2105 in FIG. 48). Details of the back surface type selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. The placement of the distribution rotor 661 is notified by a state command output from the main controller 110. This state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. This status command includes the value of the layout storage area 203j provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The layout of the distribution rotator 661 can be accurately determined based on the notified value of the layout storage area 203j. As described above, the placement data “00H” is stored in the placement storage area 203j in the initial placement of the distribution rotator 661, and at the rotation position rotated by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, or 270 degrees from the initial placement, The arrangement data of "01H", "02H", and "03H" are stored respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as the back image of the third symbol display device 81, the back face A and the back face B are provided as the back face type for the low probability of the special symbol. Of these, the back surface B is a back surface type for suggesting an arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 that is more advantageous to the player than the back surface A. On the other hand, rear surfaces C to E are provided as rear surface types for the probability change of special symbols. The back surface E is a back surface type that suggests the most advantageous arrangement for the player, and the back surface D is a back surface type that suggests an advantageous arrangement as compared with the back surface C.

  FIG. 19A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the back surface type selection table 222b. This back surface type selection table 222b is composed of a low probability time selection table 222b1 used in a low probability state of a special symbol and a probability variation time selection table 222b2 used in a probability variation state of a special symbol.

  First, the details of the low-probability time selection table 222b1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 19, in the low-probability time selection table 222b1, selectable rear surface types are defined for each of the current distribution rotator 661 and the current rear surface type. Each back face type is associated with the value of the effect counter 223g that is regularly updated in the range of "0 to 199".

  More specifically, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is the arrangement corresponding to “00H” (that is, the initial arrangement) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface A, the value of the effect counter 223g. The back surface A is associated with the range of “0 to 194”. Further, the back surface B is associated with the range of “195 to 199”. On the other hand, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is the arrangement corresponding to “00H” (that is, the initial arrangement) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface B, the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 0”. The back surface A is associated with the range of "19". On the other hand, the back surface B is associated with the range of the value of the effect counter 223g of "20 to 199". Therefore, when the distribution rotator 661 is in the initial arrangement, it is difficult to change from the back surface A to the back surface B, and when it is changed to the back surface B, it is easy to return to the back surface A. ing.

  On the other hand, when the distribution rotator 661 is arranged corresponding to “01H” (the normal distribution part 661a is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface A, The back surface A is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 179". Further, the back surface B is associated with the range of “180 to 199”. On the other hand, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is the arrangement corresponding to “01H” and the current back surface type is the back surface B, the value of the effect counter 223g is the back surface within the range of “0 to 4”. A is associated. On the other hand, the back surface B is associated with the range of the value of the effect counter 223g of "5 to 199". Therefore, compared to the initial arrangement, the rear surface A is easily changed to the rear surface B, and when the rear surface B is changed, it is difficult to return to the rear surface A.

  Here, as described above, in the 15th round of the jackpot, the ball can reach the sorting rotor 661 in a state of rotating 90 degrees clockwise from the arrangement of the sorting rotor 661 at the start of the jackpot. .. Therefore, in the arrangement in which the normal distribution portion 661a is directly below the normal flow path 652, regardless of the kind of big hit, in the 15th round of the next big hit, it is adjacent to the normal distribution portion 661a in the counterclockwise direction. The probability variation distribution unit 661d can enter the ball. That is, the arrangement corresponding to “01H” is more advantageous than the initial arrangement. Therefore, by shifting to the back surface B and maintaining the back surface B, it can be expected that the arrangement is advantageous, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the low probability state of the special symbol, the distribution rotator 661 is arranged differently from the initial arrangement (arrangement rotated by 270 degrees from the initial arrangement) because the probability variation distribution unit 661d is directly below the normal flow path 652. This is the case when the jackpot is "big hit C" in the arranged state. When transitioning from the probability change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, there are basically two types of "big hit C" and the initial arrangement, or the arrangement that is rotated by 270 degrees from the initial arrangement. Therefore, if the back surface B is reached after the probability variation state ends, it can be expected to shift to the probability variation state again at the next big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from immediately ending after the probability variation state ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the probability variation time selection table 222b2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is the initial arrangement (the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface C, the effect counter 223g is set. The back surface C is associated with the range of values "0 to 198", and the back surface D is associated with the value "199" of the effect counter 223g. When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of “0 to 29”, and the back surface D is associated with the range of “30 to 199”. ing. Therefore, it is difficult to change to the back surface D, and even if it is changed to the back surface D, it is easy to return to the back surface C again. That is, the period in which the back surface C has a low expectation is long. When the “big hit C” occurs in the state of the initial arrangement, the ball enters the normal distribution unit 661a, so that it is not possible to shift to the probability variation state after the big hit. That is, it is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by facilitating the setting on the back surface C in the initial arrangement.

  Further, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 corresponds to “01H” (the normal distribution unit 661a is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface C, , The value of the counter 223g for performance is associated with the back surface C in the range of "0 to 164", the back surface D is associated with the range of "165-198", and the value of the counter 223g for performance 223g is associated with the back surface E. Are associated with. When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface D is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 189", and the back surface E is associated with the range of "190 to 199". ing. When the current back surface type is the back surface E, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 9", and the back surface E is associated with the range of "10 to 199". ing. As described above, the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” can enter the probability variation entrance 671 at the next big hit. In addition, since the probability that the determination rate is high in the next and second big hits is “big hit C”, the probability variation state loops at least three times. Therefore, the arrangement corresponding to “01H” is the most in the probability variation state. This is an advantageous arrangement. Therefore, the rear surface C is easily changed to the rear surface D, and the rear surface D is not easily changed to the rear surface C. In addition, the rear surface E, which indicates the most advantageous state, can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to expect an advantageous state from the transition of the back surface type.

  Further, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is an arrangement corresponding to “02H” (arrangement in which the probability variation distribution unit 661d is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface C, The back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 169", and the back surface D is associated with the range of "170 to 199". When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of “0 to 4”, and the back surface D is associated with the range of “5 to 199”. ing. As described above, the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “02H” is a relatively advantageous arrangement because it is possible to enter the probability variation entrance 671 in the next big hit. Therefore, compared to the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H” or “03H”, the rear surface C is easily changed to the rear surface D, and the rear surface D is not easily changed to the rear surface C. ..

  Further, when the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661 is an arrangement corresponding to “03H” (arrangement in which the probability variation distribution unit 661c is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type is the rear surface C, The back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 194", and the back surface D is associated with the range of "195 to 199". When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 19", and the back surface D is associated with the range of "20 to 199". ing. As described above, the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H” is a disadvantageous arrangement in which the probability variation state ends and the state shifts to the normal state when the next “big hit C” occurs. Therefore, as compared with the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” or “02H”, the rear surface C is less likely to be changed to the rear surface D and is easily changed from the rear surface D to the rear surface C. . Therefore, an appropriate degree of expectation can be notified. Note that the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H” is more easily changed to the back surface D than the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”. This is because, when the next "big hit D" occurs, the arrangement after the "big hit D" corresponds to the arrangement data "02H", which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the initial placement is "big hit D", the placement after "big hit D" corresponds to the placement data "03H" which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in consideration of the case of "big hit D", the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data "03H" is configured such that the advantageous back surface type can be selected more easily.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the back surface type that is easily changed is changed according to the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661. Thereby, even a player who does not understand the correspondence relationship between the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 and the degree of advantage can estimate the degree of advantage according to the back surface type, so that a more recognizable effect is provided. be able to.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a probability variation state flag 223e, and a rotation position storage area 223f. At least an effect counter 223g, an excess winning flag 223h, a power-off flag 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area including one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. The winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control unit 110, various information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is obtained. The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the prize information command is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the variation effect suspended in the main controller 110 is retained. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of waiting times) up to four times for each type of special symbol.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is set by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It is designed to be managed on a case-by-case basis.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110 special symbols When the variable display in is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the number of holding balls indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e The command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, from the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, or the special symbol 2 holding ball The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1707 in FIG. 44). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball number of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and after storing the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when this display hold ball number command is received, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number for the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. You can change it while doing it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 44), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2002 in FIG. 47). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 44), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2008 of FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The probability variation state flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variation state. The probability variation state flag 223e is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 44). In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the probability variation state flag 223e whether the state is the probability variation state, and whether the rear surface type is changed is determined.

  The rotation position storage area 223f is a storage area for storing arrangement data indicating the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661. The rotation position storage area 223f has the same configuration as the arrangement storage area 203j of the main controller 110. That is, in the initial arrangement (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 661b is directly below the normal flow path 652), the arrangement data of "00H" is stored, and at the rotational position rotated by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, or 270 degrees from the initial arrangement. , Placement data of “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” are stored, respectively. The rotational position storage area 223f stores the arrangement data stored in the arrangement storage area 203j notified by the status command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 44). In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the probability variation state flag 223e whether the state is the probability variation state, and whether the rear surface type is changed is determined.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter that is referred to when the back surface type is selected at the start of the variable display based on the back surface type selection table 222b. As described above, the back surface type selection table 223b defines the back surface type to be selected for each value of the effect counter 223g. The effect counter 223g is composed of, for example, a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199". The value of the effect counter 223g is updated by 1 in the main process (see FIG. 43), for example. By using the effect counter 223g, it is possible to give randomness to the selection of the back surface type.

  The excess winning flag 223h is equal to or more than a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) during the opening period of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. It is a flag indicating whether or not the ball has won. If this excess winning flag 223h is on, it means that a predetermined number or more of balls have already been entered, and if it is off, it means that the number of winning balls is less than the specified number. This over-winning prize flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined in the jackpot-related processing that the closing command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1802 in FIG. 45), and indicates a start of a new round. It is set to OFF when it is determined that the several commands or the ending command indicating the start of the big hit ending is received (see S1810 and S1813 in FIG. 45). In the present embodiment, when a ball entering the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is detected (when the ball is notified from the main control device 110 by a winning command). When the excess winning flag 223h is referred to and the winning number exceeds the specified number (when the excessive winning flag 223h is on), special notification different from usual is executed (setting a special winning sound). As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the number of award balls, which is larger than the number of award balls normally obtained in one round, can be obtained, so that the player is more satisfied. It can make you feel.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 43). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a fixed time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 42), when the power-off flag 223 y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 42), the power-off flag 223 y remains constant after being set on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1509 in FIG. 42). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, a lapse timer for measuring the effect time, and the like. is doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 44) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2, which will be described later, of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 27) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored in the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 49).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the display control device 114 to operate as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the variation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is "a big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 22 (c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22B and 22C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. FIG. 23B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “sky stage”, respectively. .

  As described above, the back surface A and the back surface B are both back surface types set in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the back surface B is more advantageous than the back surface A (the distribution rotator 661). It is configured so that it can be easily set in (arrangement). On the other hand, the back surface C and the back surface D are the back surface types set in the specially changed state of the special symbol, and the back surface D is set in a more advantageous state (arrangement of the distribution rotator 661) than the back surface C. It is configured to be easy. Further, FIG. 24 shows the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”. As described above, the rear surface E is one of the rear surface types set in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the distribution rotor 661 has the most advantageous arrangement (corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”, of the normal flow path 652). This is a rear surface type that can be set only in the case of the arrangement in which the portion immediately below is the normal distribution unit 661a) (see FIG. 20).

  As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A to D, as shown in FIG. 23, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled by a simple connection.

  When the change of the back surface type is decided based on the back surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 causes the corresponding back surface to be changed. First, the position between a and a ′ of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image of the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

  On the other hand, the back surface image on the back surface E is, as shown in FIG. 24, with the passage of time, in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back surface E is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 24A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black over time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further changes to orange with the passage of time. Then, after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 24 (a) is returned to and the back images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while displaying the "town stage" which is the initial stage. Therefore, the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “River stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 24 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear-side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the startup processing of the above.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data of all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range shown in FIGS. 24A to 24B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIGS. 24A and 24B) including the initial position is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 can be stored when the change of the stage is decided by the lottery at the start of fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the rear surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

  In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surfaces B to D, the range from the position a to the position b is changed from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. This allows the image data from the position b ′ to the position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, on the rear surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 24A and 24B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 24 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 24 (b) to 24 (c) and FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) to (b) is set. As a result, while the images of FIGS. 24A to 24B are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 24B to 24C and 24C to 24A are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images of FIGS. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 24 (b) to 24 (c) and 24 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  It should be noted that, on the rear surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the sub image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back surface image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back surface image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back surface image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be stored is redundantly stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so that the image flows leftward.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, although the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered the ball, the first symbol display device 37, although the variation effect has been started, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 is for resident use. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, and for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state, and the large opening ports (the first large opening port 65a and the second large opening port 650a) that are normally closed are repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The semi-transparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semi-transparent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type is one of the back surfaces A to E corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player. Information that specifies whether to display any one or a rear image different from the rear images A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by the back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to E, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 25) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines such as pachinko machines other than gaming machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 26).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 22A to 22C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2205 in FIG. 49). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3805 in FIG. 60B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2501 in FIG. 51B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2508 of FIG. 51 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 51B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 51 (b) S2509) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 52 to 56) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 57 to 59) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3701 in FIG. 60A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 27) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 27) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 on the basis of the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. )), The pointer update process (see S3405 in FIG. 57) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list to be described later. (Refer to FIG. 27), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite which should start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 27, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved sphere number pattern 1, reserved sphere number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3407 of FIG. 57). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3913 in FIG. 61). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S3914 in FIG. 61). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4002 in FIG. 62).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S2506 of FIG. 51B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when the back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 is received (see S3201 in FIG. 56A). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3909 in FIG. 61) and set to OFF when the back image changing process is executed (see S3910 in FIG. 61). As a result, the back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back face type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the back type corresponding to the ON bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. When the back image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the back image notified by the command is set to this back image discrimination flag 233x (S3202 in FIG. 56). reference). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The back surface image discrimination flag 233x makes it possible to easily specify the currently set back surface type.

  The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 57) (see S3421 in FIG. 57), and the demo display data table is displayed. When another display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is set to OFF (S2705 in FIG. 53A, S2905 in FIG. 54A, S3005 in FIG. 54B). , S3105 in FIG. 55). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 57) (S3414 in FIG. 57), and the confirmation display flag other than the confirmation display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2705 of FIG. 53 (a), S2905 of FIG. 54 (a), S3005 of FIG. 54 (b), FIG. 55 S3105). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmed display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 41. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, The starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S901), it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e from the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, and the extracted value holds the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the sphere counter 223b.

  After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (variable display of the special symbol 1 The number of times of reservation N1) is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 number of reserved balls counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209).

  In the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d. The value (N1) of 1 is subtracted from 1 (S210), and the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved sphere number command (special figure 1 reserved sphere number command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S901), it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 holding sphere number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d from the special figure 1 holding sphere number command, and the extracted value holds the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the sphere counter 223b.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S212), and the process proceeds to S213. To do. In the process of S213, which is executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is ended. The details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol lottery is performed. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of jackpots A to D is determined.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and in the case of the big hit C, , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of a big hit D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S217). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S217: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 (S218), the start of the jackpot for the special symbol is set (S219), and the process to S222. And transition. When the jackpot start of the special symbol is set by the process of S219, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes, and the opening command is set. (S1002). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S220), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. If there is (S220: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222. In the process of S222, a stop command is set (S222), and then this process ends. Although illustration is omitted, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted by the processing of S221 becomes 0, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol has shifted to the low probability state. Set the status command to notify.

  The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state and the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 (the arrangement data stored in the arrangement storage area 203j) included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b, the "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" lottery (judgment determination) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, which is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and , Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, referring to the state of the probability variation counter 203g, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change of the special symbol (that is, the probability change counter 203g is on) (S302: Yes), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 10A) one by one. As described above, ten random numbers "1 to 10" are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability variation (that is, the probability variation counter 203g is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 10 (a)), a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit It is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value “0” stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, "0"), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot for the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined as a jackpot for the special symbol (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b to determine what the big hit type is. . As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 69”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (15R short open big hit). However, if it is in the range of “70 to 99”, it is determined to be a big hit B (15R long open big hit) (see FIG. 10B). On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 is a big hit in the lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 69”, it is determined that it is a big hit C (15R short open big hit), If it is in the range of "70 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot D (15R long open jackpot) (see FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ( Change time).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 being set, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front / rear reach, non-front / rear reach, or complete disengagement is set. .

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear disconnection is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol comes off in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 36). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31, a start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Is a process for executing a process of holding the values indicated by the various random number counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d ( If N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the special symbol 1 holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The special figure 1 reserved sphere number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and external output processing (S901) of main processing (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is extracted from the reserved sphere number command, and the extracted value is the special symbol reserved sphere number counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command in the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, it is determined whether the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) (S407). In this process as well, similar to the process of S401, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S408). ), It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 4 When it is determined that it is not less than (that is, 4) (S409: No), this processing is ended as it is, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the special symbol 2 is held. One is added to the value (N2) of the sphere number counter 203e (S410). Then, the special symbol 2 holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The special figure 2 reserved sphere number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and external output processing (S901) of main processing (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e from the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, and the extracted value holds the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the sphere counter 223b.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding sphere number command in the process of S411, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value is stored in the first area of the empty space holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and this processing ends and the timer interrupt is performed. Return to processing. In the process of S412, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and is associated with the second symbol variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S501). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included in the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the period in which the special symbol is in the probability changing state and the period in which the normal symbol is in the time saving state match. Therefore, in the process of S508, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and if the value is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S509). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because the special symbol big hit (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, so the second winning opening This is because the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is opened to prevent the sphere trying to win the second specific winning opening 650a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

  In the process of S509, if it is not in the special symbol big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10C).

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S512), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S512: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514), and if it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit now (S515). ). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, if the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. The time is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S512: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S518). In the processing of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S519), when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more) (S519: Yes). ), The variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0) (S519: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds. (S521), the present process ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S522). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S522, if the variation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for normal symbols is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S523, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or the processing of S518, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S905) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 28), and it is judged whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, the passage of a ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S603). : No), the present process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. In the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous power-off process was not normally completed, the process proceeds to S814 in this case as well.

  If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S814. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S914 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S814, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S814). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S815, S816) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S815, S816) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S815, S816) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S815, S816), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S815), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S816).

  After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed in the process of S816, the distribution rotor 661 is set to the initial arrangement (S817). That is, the rotating body motor 662a is driven to set the normal distribution portion 661b directly below the normal flow path 652. It should be noted that the distribution rotor 661 is provided with an origin sensor (not shown), and is configured to turn on (the output is high) when the distribution rotor 661 is initially placed. Therefore, in the processing of S817, the output of the origin sensor is monitored, and the distribution rotator 661 is rotated until the output becomes high. After the process of S817 is completed, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S808). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the placement storage area 203j are read (S811), and a status command for notifying the read values of the probability variation counter 203g and the placement storage area 203j to the voice lamp controller 113 is set (S812). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state and the placement data of the distribution rotor 661 included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10. After the process of S812 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S813), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special lamp variation process (see FIG. 29) and the start winning process (see FIG. 31) set the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command, special figure 2 reserved ball number command) to the voice lamp control device. Send to 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the Jackpot control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The process is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, whether the maximum opening time has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a for each round in the big hit state , Or determine if a specified number of balls have been won. When either of these conditions is established, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a is repeated in the 1st to 14th rounds, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed in the 15th round. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, if the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the variable display that is normally, in the display mode set by the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32) or the process of S518, stop display of the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 255 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  In addition, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 34 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 35) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the first specific winning a prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening mouth) 65a (1st to 14th rounds) and the second specific winning opening (second large opening mouth) 650a (15th round).

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1003), and this process is ended.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1004). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1004: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1005). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1005: Yes), the operation of the large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a) and the operation of the distribution rotator 661 according to the number of rounds are performed. The jackpot operation setting process for setting is executed (S1006), and this process ends. The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1005, if it is not the start timing of the new round (S1005: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1007). Specifically, when the special game state (all 15 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached.

  In the processing of S1007, when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1007: Yes), the ending command is set (S1008), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the audio lamp control in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1007, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1007: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current big hit (special game state) (S1009). That is, it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1009, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1009: No), depending on the winning of the large opening (the first large opening 65a, the second large opening 650a) The winning process for performing the above process is executed (S1011). The details of the winning process (S1011) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1011) is completed, an abnormal process is performed to determine whether the ball that has entered the large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a) has been normally discharged. Then (S1012), the present process is terminated. Details of this abnormality processing (S1012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1009, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1009: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the jackpot end is executed (S1010), and the present process is ended. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1010) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1006) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1006). This big hit operation setting process (S1006) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, the large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a) according to the number of rounds. ) And the operation of the distribution rotator 661.

  When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, it is first determined whether it is the start timing of 15 rounds (S1101). If it is not the start timing of 15 rounds (S1101: No), it is started this time. This means that the first large opening 65a is opened (S1102) and the present process is terminated because it means that the round to be performed is any one of 1 to 14 rounds. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is the start timing of 15R (S1101: Yes), the opening pattern (see FIG. 13) of the second large opening port 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1103), The read release pattern is set (S1104).

  When the process of S1104 ends, then, the operation pattern corresponding to the jackpot type of this time is read from the rotating body pattern table 202e (see FIG. 12) (S1105), and the read rotation operation of the distribution rotor 661 is set. Yes (S1106). Then, the operation of the guide member 651a (see FIG. 13) is set (S1107), and this processing ends.

  By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38), it is possible to accurately set the opening pattern and the operation of the distribution rotator 661 according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1010) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S1010). This jackpot end processing (S1010) is executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37) and, as described above, is a processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end.

  In the jackpot ending process (S1010), first, the data in the arrangement storage area 203j is shifted by the number of bits according to the jackpot type this time (S1201). More specifically, with respect to the value stored in the arrangement storage area 203j, the jackpot type in which the distribution rotor 661 rotates 90 degrees according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotating operation corresponding to the jackpot may be used. For example, 1 is added, 2 is added for a jackpot type that rotates 180 degrees, 3 is added for a jackpot type that rotates 270 degrees, and 0 is added for a jackpot type that rotates 360 degrees. When the value after addition exceeds "03H", 4 is subtracted from the value so that the value becomes any of "00H" to "03H". As a result, the arrangement data indicating the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 can be updated accurately.

  When the process of S1201 is completed, it is then determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203k is on (S1202). This means that a sphere has entered, so by setting the value of the probability variation counter 203g to 100, a probability variation state of 100 times is set after a big hit (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, if the probability variation setting flag 203k is off (S1202: No), the processing of S2103 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1204.

  In the process of S1204, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot is set from the respective values of the arrangement storage area 203j and the probability variation counter 203g (S1204), the jackpot flag 203i, and Both the probability variation setting flags 203k are set to OFF (S1205), and this processing ends.

  By executing this jackpot ending process (see FIG. 39), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set depending on whether or not the player has entered the probability variation ball entrance 671 during the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40, the details of the winning process (S1011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1011). This winning process (S1011) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, it corresponds to the winning of the large opening (the first large opening 65a, the second large opening 650a). This is a process for controlling.

  In the winning process (S1011), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the valid period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, an interval period (3 seconds) from the open state of the large opening (first large opening 65a or second large opening 650a). It is the period until the end. In the process of S1301, if it is not the round valid period (S1301: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the current round is in the valid period (S1301: Yes), then, a prize is awarded to the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a). It is determined whether or not it is detected (S1302), and if the winning for the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203m is set. 1 is added and updated (S1303). Then, a winning command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the winning of the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is set (S1304), and the process proceeds to S1305. .

  The winning command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the winning command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a winning sound for notifying the winning of the ball. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that a prize ball will be awarded based on the winning. Therefore, it is possible to please the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if the winning of the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is not detected (S1302: No), the processing of S1303 and S1304 is skipped, The process moves to S1305.

  In the process of S1305, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203m is 10 or more (S1305), and if the value of the winning number counter 203m is 10 or more (S1305: Yes), the winning number becomes the upper limit value. As a result, a close command for notifying that the large opening (first large opening 65a or second large opening 650a) has been closed is set (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  The closing command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the closing command, it sets the winning sound to be set for the subsequent winning to a special winning sound different from the normal winning sound. That is, the number of balls that exceed the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round (11 or more) due to a plurality of balls winning the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) at the same time. When a winning a prize is detected, a special winning sound is set. This allows the player to recognize that more prize balls than usual will be paid out. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1305, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203m is 9 or less (S1305: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1306), and if the round time has elapsed. (S1306: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  In the process of S1308, the open large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a) is set to be closed (S1308), and the guiding member solenoid 209 is set to OFF to guide the vehicle. The member 651a is immersed (S1309). Then, after the remaining ball timer flag 203n, the probability variation valid flag 203r, and the round end flag 203q are set to ON (S1310), the process proceeds to S1311.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1306, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1306: No), at the closing timing of the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a). Since it means that there is not, the processing of S1308 to S1310 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1311.

  In the process of S1311, it is determined whether or not the round end flag 203q is on (S1311), and if the round end flag is off, the process proceeds to S1312. On the other hand, if the round end flag 203q is turned on (S1311: Yes), it means that it is a ball-blanking period after closing the large opening (the first large opening 65a or the second large opening 650a). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203r is on (S1315). In the process of S1315, if the probability variation valid flag 203r is off (S1315: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203r is on (S1315: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s (S1316), and then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is the upper limit value (1. It is determined whether it is 5 seconds) (S1317). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is not the upper limit value (S1317: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1312, and the process of monitoring the entry into the probability variation entrance ball 671 and updating the probability variation setting flag 203k is executed. To do. As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203s is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the probability variation switch (whether the ball has entered the probability variation entrance port 671). The probability variation game state can be set. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being improperly passed by passing the ball through the probability variation switch.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is the upper limit value (S1317: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203r and the round end flag 203q are set to OFF (S1318), and the value of the probability variation valid timer 203s is reset (S1319). ), And this processing ends.

  In the process of S1312, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation switch (entered at the probability variation entrance ball 671) (S1312), and if the ball has not passed through the probability variation switch (S1312: No), This processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch (S1312: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203u (S1313), the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1314), and this processing is executed. finish.

  Next, the abnormality processing (S1012) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1012). This abnormal process (S1012) is a process executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, the large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a) This is a process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered is normally discharged.

  In the abnormality processing (S1012), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the round valid period (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is in the valid period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed a ball discharge switch (not shown) (S1402). As the ball outlet switch, there are a first outlet switch for detecting a ball discharged from the first variable winning device 65, and a ball discharged from the normal ball inlets 672, 673 of the second variable winning device 650. A second ejection switch for detection is provided.

  In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has passed one of the ball discharge port switches (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ball discharge number counter 203t (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. . On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1404). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1404: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is in the ball-expelling period, and the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (S1406), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S1406: No), the book is left as it is. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S1406: Yes), then the number of discharged particles (the value of the probability variation passage counter 203u and the value of the ball discharged number counter 203t) It is determined whether the total value) matches the winning number (S1407).

  In the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the number of ejected coins does not match the number of winning coins (S1407: No), an error command is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, if the game ball is left illegally in the second variable winning device 650 and, for example, the distribution rotator 661 is the big hit A in the initial arrangement state, the ball is inserted into the certainty variation ball inlet 671. Fraud can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that the discharged number and the winning number match (S1407: Yes), the process of S1408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203p is reset (S1410). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203m, the ball discharging number counter 203t, and the probability variation passage counter 203u are reset (S1411), and this processing is finished.

  By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 41), a ball clogging occurs in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650, or the like, so that the large opening (first large opening 65a, or It is possible to early detect and notify the occurrence of the problem that the ball entering the second large opening 650a) is not normally discharged. Further, in the 15th round of the big hit, the ball is left unjustly on the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 (upstream of the guide member 651a), and the guide member 651a is projected (the ball is the positive variation channel 653). It is possible to detect an improper act of causing the ball to flow down onto the guide member 651a at an early stage by observing the timing (after 2 seconds from the start of the 15th round) when it becomes a state in which the ball can be guided to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 42, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1616 (see FIG. 43) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 43, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 43), the power-off process of S1616 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1616 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1502: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1616 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written by the process of S1506. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the startup processing this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508. .

  In the process of S1502, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1502: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the power-off process of S1616, It is started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1504, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the storage areas of the entire range of the RAM 223 are checked (S1504), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1505). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  In the process of S1505, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( (S1506), the process proceeds to S1508. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1505, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1616 is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 43). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed, the process of S1508 with the power-off flag 223y being turned on is the moment when the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after a general power failure has occurred and the processing is started in a state in which the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  After the process of S1510, the probability variation state flag 223e and the rotation position storage area 223f are updated according to the notification content of the state command set in the startup process (see FIG. 35) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (S1511). ). With this, the state of the pachinko machine 10 (game state and arrangement of the distribution rotator 661) can be accurately grasped after the power is turned on. After the process of S1511, the interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1504 to S1506 is followed via S1508. Or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509 which is a work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processes of S1510 to S1512 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1509 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1504 when the processing of S1508 is reached through the processing of S1504 to S1506. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1602 to S1610, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the variable display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1602 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1605 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the reserved quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the display control device 114 causes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the big hit due to the change this time, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives the feeling of expectation to the big hit. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as a determination button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1608), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1609, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output processing of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1610 ends, the process moves to the process of S1611. In the processing of S1611, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

  When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the processing of S1613, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1613: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S1615), and the power is turned on. A disconnection process is executed (S1616). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1617), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1614: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination processing (S1611) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1702), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. (S1703), this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 The value (holding number N1 of variable display in special symbol 1), or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in special symbol 2) is extracted, and this is special in the voice lamp control device 113. It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (S1708). In the process of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1708 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) or when the special symbol is drawn. Since it is transmitted, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is set to the main controller 110 by the processing of S1708. The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e can be adjusted. Therefore, due to noise or the like, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number 203e Even if it is deviated, at the time of detection of the start winning and the lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and It can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. When the process of S1708 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether the state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1709). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S1709: Yes), the values of the probability variation status flag 223e and the rotational position storage area 223f are updated according to the received command (S1710). That is, based on the information corresponding to the game state (whether or not the probability variation state) included in the status command, when the probability variation state is notified, the probability variation state flag 223e is set to ON and the normal state is notified. If so, the probability variation state flag 2223e is set to OFF. Also, the arrangement data included in the state command is stored in the rotation position storage area 223f. As a result, when the state of the pachinko machine 10 (one or both of the gaming state and the placement of the distribution rotor) is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if the state command has not been received (S1709: No), then a jackpot-related command (either a closing command, a winning command, an opening command, a round number command, or an ending command) is received. It is determined whether or not (S1711). When it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S1711: Yes), the jackpot-related command is determined, the jackpot-related processing for executing the corresponding control is executed (S1712), and this processing is ended. To do.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1711, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S1711: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1713), and this processing ends. In the process of S1713, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a jackpot-related process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this jackpot related processing (S1712).

  In the jackpot-related process, first, it is determined whether or not a closing command is received (S1801), and if a closing command is received (S1801: Yes), a large opening (first large opening 65a or second) Since this means that the maximum number of balls (10 balls) has been won in the large opening 650a), the excessive winning flag 223h is set to ON (S1802), and this processing is ended. By turning on the excess winning flag 223h, a special notification sound can be set at the time of winning a prize for the large opening thereafter. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the number of award balls, which is larger than the number of award balls normally obtained in one round, can be obtained, so that the player is more satisfied. It can make you feel.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, when it is determined that the closing command is not received (S1801: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning command is received (S1803). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1803: Yes), a winning effect setting process for setting a winning sound (winning effect) associated with the winning of the large opening is executed (S1804), This process ends. Details of this winning effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1803, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1803: No), it is then determined whether the opening command has been received (S1805), and the opening command has been received. If (S1805: Yes), the opening command for display is set (S1806). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect for notifying the start of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81. When the process of S1806 ends, the main jackpot-related process (see FIG. 45) ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1805, when it is determined that the opening command is not received (S1805: No), it is then determined whether the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1807). When it is determined that the round number command is received (S1807: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1808), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. Yes (S1809). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S1809, the excessive winning flag 223h is set to OFF (S1810), and this processing is ended. By setting the excessive winning flag 223h to OFF here, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the special winning sound from being set every time the ball wins the large opening mouth during the execution of a new round. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused because the meaning of the special winning sound becomes unclear.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1807, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1811). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1811: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1812), the excessive winning flag 223h is set to OFF (S1813), and this processing is ended. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1811, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1811: No), this processing ends. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to jackpots.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the winning effect setting process (S1804) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the winning effect setting process (S1804).

  In the winning effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the excessive winning flag 223h is turned on (S1901), and if the excessive winning flag 223h is turned on (S1901: Yes), it is output along with the winning of the large opening. The special winning sound is set as the sound effect (S1902). Next, a display winning effect command corresponding to the excessive winning effect is set (S1903), and this processing is ended. By setting a special winning sound and excess winning performance, it is easy to let the player understand that it was possible to win a number of balls exceeding the specified number into the large opening mouth, so it is easier than the normal round It is possible to give satisfaction to having won many prize balls.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the excess winning flag 223h is not on (S1901: No), the normal winning sound is set as the sound effect output along with the winning of the large opening (( S1904). Next, a display winning effect command corresponding to the normal winning effect is set (S1905), and this processing is ended.

  By executing this winning effect setting process, it is possible to execute winning effects corresponding to the number of winnings to the large opening. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player whether or not an excessive prize has been generated and more prize balls than usual can be obtained. Therefore, depending on the number of prize balls acquired, the player can be notified. It can make you feel satisfied.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1612). This fluctuation display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S2007 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2002), and then S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44). In the process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, a back image changing process for determining whether to change the back image is executed (S2006), and then the process proceeds to S2007. The details of the back image changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2007, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2007). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2007: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2007: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S2008), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44). At, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2009). Next, based on the stop type acquired in the process of S2009, a display stop type command is set (S2010), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display stop type command, the stop type of the third symbol is controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. To be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the rear image change processing (S2006) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the back image changing process (S2006). The back image changing process (S2006) is a process for determining whether or not to change the back image, as described above.

  When the back image change process (see FIG. 48) is executed, first, the probability change state flag 223e provided in the RAM 223, the value of the effect counter 223g, and the content of the rotation position storage area 223f are read (S2101). It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the specially changed state of the special symbol (S2102). Then, in the process of S2102, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state (S2102: Yes), the rotation position from the probability variation time selection table 222b2 of the back surface type selection table 222b, and the value of the effect counter 223g are corresponded. The rear surface type to be selected is selected (S2103), and the process proceeds to S2105.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2102, when it is determined that the state is not the probable variation state (that is, the normal state) (S2102: No), it corresponds to the rotation position from the low-probability time selection table 222b1 and the value of the effect counter 223g. The back surface type is selected (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105.

  In the process of S2105 executed after the process of S2103 or S2104, it is determined whether or not the rear surface type is changed (S2105). That is, it is determined whether the rear surface type read from the rear surface type selection table 222b is different from the current rear surface type, and if it is determined that the rear surface type is not changed (S2105: No), this processing To finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S21205, when it is determined that the rear surface type is to be changed (S2105: Yes), a display rear surface image change command for notifying the rear surface type after the change is set (S2106), and this processing is ended. .

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 62. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 49, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, the MPU 231 does not directly read and process the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. , Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2303). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 49). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is ended, and the boot process is ended.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 50, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be performed after the process of S2302. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. Alternatively, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2302.

  As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 49. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2203, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2205). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3702 in FIG. 60A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 22 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51B). The determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 51B) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 51B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given. When it is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2205, the interrupt permission is set (S2206), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51A, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 27) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 51B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2502) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2503) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2502), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed, and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56.

  In the display setting process (S2503), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like, for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81. The content of the image is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, the task process is executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2504), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505). , And sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, out-of-front / rear reach, other than out-of-front / outside) The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete disengagement) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 22 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed, and the S2504 Move to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2502) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2603).

  Then, first of all the unprocessed commands, it is judged whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2705), and this processing ends.

  By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 53A), the display setting process updates the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2704, and the display data table buffer 233d is updated by the process of S2701. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted to specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, S2702. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of 1., and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is Character ROM 23 beforehand From to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2703 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. If it is determined in the process of S2604 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606). If there is a display stop type command (S2606: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2607), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (either big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / out, or complete disconnection) is dealt with. The stop type table is determined (S2801), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51 (b)) is executed, and the third is compared. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2802).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2803), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation based on the data table is started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2504), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2803, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2801, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2802.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2606, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2608: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2609) and the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the opening command process (S2609) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S2905), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2608, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), and display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S2610: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the round number command processing (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp controller 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3001). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3002).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3004). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are turned off (S3005), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the process of S2610, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2612), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2612: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2613), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, details of the ending command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3102).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3104). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3105), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. In the processing of S2612, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2614), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2614: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2615), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2615) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON to notify the normal image transfer setting process (S3703) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command. Then, among the bits forming the back surface image determination flag 233x, the bit corresponding to the back surface type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and the bits corresponding to the other back surface types are set to off (S3202). ), The back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S3201 is turned on, each bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S3202 is changed to the changed back face. Specify the image type. If the specified back image type is the back images B to E, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing (S2504), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in S3202. From the above, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  In the present embodiment, when performing variable display, a lottery (discrimination) as to whether or not to change the rear surface type is performed. Since the variable display has a variable time of at least 7 seconds, it does not receive more than one back image change command within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing command determination processing, 2 Although there should be no case where the above back image change command is stored, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise etc. and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a back image change command. . In the process of S3202, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. In the processing of S2614, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2614: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2616), and there is an error command. If (S2616: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2617), and the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the error command process (S2617) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. The error command process is a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3302), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3302, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. When it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2616 (S2616: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2618), and the process returns to S2601.

  In the processing of S2601 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), And the processes of S2602 to S2618 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2602 to S2618 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the processing of S2601 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2508) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 22, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 53A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 53B), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and For a command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 53A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2701. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2702, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, details of the above-described display setting process (S2503) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if the new command flag is off (S3401: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3402 to S3404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3402), and then S3403 to S3404. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3403). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3404).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3501).

  In the task processing (S2504), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle of each sprite are specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 57. After the warning image setting process (S3404) or in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3403: No), the process proceeds to S3405.

  In the processing of S3405, pointer updating processing is executed (S3405). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3601, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Is determined (S3602). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f is updated past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3603), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3603: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3605), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3606), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3602, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3602: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

  Here, returning to FIG. 57, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S3406 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3407), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3408). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3408: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag 233z is on. Yes (S3409).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is OFF (S3409: No), the confirmed display data table is not displayed yet, and the confirmed display effect is generated. Therefore, first, the confirmed display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. (S3410), and then, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3411). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3412), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3414), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3415), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2504), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the variation was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3415, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if the confirmed display flag 233z is on (S3409: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S3416). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3416: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. The contents are cleared by setting in the table buffer 233d (S3417) and then writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3418). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3420), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3421), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  As a result, after the fixed display effect is finished, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3416, if the demo display flag 233y is turned on (S3416: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is directly performed. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2509) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 51B). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The display data table that defines that the image (1) in FIG. 22 (b) or (c) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, details of the transfer setting process (S2505) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3702), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for causing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3701, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It means that it has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3702) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S3702).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S3801), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S3801: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3802). In the process of S3802, after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S3802 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3802: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to S3803. Further, as a result of the processing of S3801, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the processing proceeds to S3803.

  In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3803: No), it is not A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the resident image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3803, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S3803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3805), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 51B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 51B) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 51B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 52 to 56) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 57 to 59) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S3701: No in FIG. 60A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a normal image transfer setting process (S3703) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3405) of the previously executed display setting process (S2503). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3902), and if it is transfer data information (S3902: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3903, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to step S3905.

  In the process of S3902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3902: No), the processes of S3903 and S3904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3905. In the process of S3905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3906).

  In the process of S3906, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the process of S3906 that the transfer process is not completed (S3906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to S3907. Also, as a result of the processing in S3905, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3905: No), the process proceeds to S3907.

  In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907). If the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3908), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3903 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3907: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S3909).

  If the back image change flag 233w is turned on (S3909: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is turned off (S3910), it is provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the on-state among the back image discrimination flags 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3911). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) ) Is acquired (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3913.

  In the process of S3909, if the rear image change flag 233w is not turned on but is turned off (S3909: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  If the bit of the back image discrimination flag 233w in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back face A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the normal video RAM 236. There is no image data to transfer to. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the bit in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is directly terminated.

  In the process of S3913, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). The determination in the process of S3913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3913 (S3913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3913, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3914). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3914, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3915), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a sub as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the above-described drawing process (S2506) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated (S4001). That is, in the process of S4001, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2504). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4002, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S4003). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 51B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the first variable winning a prize device 65 and the second variable award winning device 65 are provided as prize winning devices that are awarded by hitting a ball when a big hit occurs. Two winning devices, the variable winning device 650 and the variable winning device 650 are provided. The first variable winning device 65 can enter a ball in the first to 14th rounds of a big hit, and the second variable winning device 650 can enter a ball in a 15th round of a big hit. In addition, inside the second variable winning a prize device 650, the probability variation entrance 671 in which the probability variation state is set after the big hit by the ball entering, and the ball entering the second variable award winning device 650 are accurately changed. A distribution rotator 661 that distributes to any of a plurality of ball entrances (ball entrance areas) including the ball entrance 671 is provided. The distribution rotator 661 is provided with a plurality of distribution units (normal distribution units 661a and 661b, and positive variation distribution units 661c and 661d) around which the sphere can enter, and the sphere enters. The balls are distributed to the entrances corresponding to the distribution unit. In other words, the ball entrance into which the sphere is distributed differs depending on the rotation position of the distribution rotator 661.

  The distribution rotator 661 performs different rotation operations according to the jackpot type in 15 rounds of the jackpot. That is, the rotation amount (movable amount) of the distribution rotor 661 is different for each jackpot type. Further, the timing at which the ball can be entered into the second variable winning device 650 is changed according to the type of jackpot (the opening pattern of the second specific winning port 650a is also changed). As a result, the balls can enter the second specific winning port 650a at different rotation positions for each jackpot type. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the game during the big hit by paying attention to the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 and the kind of the big hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big hit from being a work for simply obtaining a prize ball. However, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 at the end of the big hit is configured to be maintained until the next big hit. Thereby, even in the case of the same jackpot type, the easiness of the balls to be distributed to the probability variation entrance 671 (the degree of advantage for the player) is changed according to the arrangement of the sorting rotor 661 at the start of the jackpot. You can That is, even in the case of the same jackpot type, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the degree of advantage and the degree of disadvantage are different according to the type of jackpot previously won (history of jackpot). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, different rotation operation patterns of the distribution rotator 661 are set for jackpots in which the same opening pattern is set for the same second specific winning opening 650a according to the gaming state at the time of jackpot. It is configured. And, in the low probability state of the special symbol, a disadvantageous opening pattern (difficult to enter the probability variation entrance 671) becomes advantageous in the probability variation state of the special symbol (easy entry into the probability variation entrance 671) Will be configured). That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the advantages and disadvantages of the open pattern are changed according to the state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation operation of the distribution rotor 661 is changed according to the jackpot type, and the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 at the end of the jackpot is held until the next jackpot. , The advantage is made different according to the history of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of using the second variable winning device 650, it may be configured to be controllably realized by a process when selecting a jackpot type. More specifically, as jackpot types, there is a definite variation jackpot that always leads to a probable state after a jackpot if you win, and a regular jackpot that always transitions to a normal state after a jackpot when you win. The history of is stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Then, it is possible to change the ratio of the probability-changing jackpot according to the history of jackpots stored in the RAM 203. For example, when the previous time is the normal jackpot, the proportion of the normal jackpot selected is high, and in the case of the probability-varying jackpot, the probability of selecting the probability-varying jackpot is high. As a result, in the normal state, it is not possible to easily shift to the probability variation state, but once it is possible to shift to the probability variation state, it is possible to realize a game characteristic in which it is easy to continuously shift to the probability variation state. It is possible to play a game with a sharpness depending on the state. Further, when the probability variation jackpots are, for example, three or more consecutive, it may be configured to increase the rate at which the regular jackpots are determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the probability variation state being too continuous and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed. Moreover, since the second variable winning device 650 can be deleted, the cost ratio of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, four distribution units (normal distribution units 661a and 661b, and positive variation distribution units 661c and 661d) are provided for the distribution rotation body 661. However, the normal distribution unit and the positive variation distribution units are provided. The ratio to the parts and the total number of the distribution parts are not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily. The distribution rotator 661 is not limited to the circular shape, and may have any shape such as a triangle or a quadrangle. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation pattern (rotation angle) of the rotation operation set in the distribution rotor 661 is changed according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the distribution rotor 661 is simply rotated at a constant rotation speed, and the time until the 15th round is completed is made different so that the rotation amount (movable amount) of the distribution rotor 661 until the jackpot is completed. The jackpot may be different for each type. As a result, the operation pattern of the distribution rotator 661 can be reduced, so that the amount of data in the rotator pattern table 202e can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the rotational position at which the ball can enter is determined for each jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the distribution rotator 661 may be rotated at a speed at which it is difficult to aim at the distribution unit, and the opening time of the second specific winning port 650a may be changed according to the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a simpler game in which the longer the opening time, the easier the ball enters the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 71. In the above-described first embodiment, the easiness of shifting to the probability changing state after the big hit is variable by changing the rotating operation of the distribution rotor 661 for each big hit type. In addition, depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 661 at the start of the big hit, the ease with which the probability change state is changed (the rate of entering the sure change entrance 671) is different even for the same big hit type. . As a result, a novel game property is realized in which the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661 and the combination of the jackpot type are advantageous or disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the operation of the distribution rotator 661 at the time of a big hit is common, and the opening pattern of the second specific winning port 650a in the 15 rounds of a big hit is made different, so that the ball can easily enter. The distribution part is different. Further, instead of the distribution rotator 661, a distribution rotator 6610 provided with a section in which two normal distribution units are continuous and a section in which three normal variability distribution units are continuous is used, and the deterministic variation state is used. The probability variation state is configured to loop up to three times in accordance with the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 at the first transition to. The number of loops is different depending on the type of jackpot that has transitioned to the probability change state. As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the jackpot type and the arrangement of the distribution rotator 661, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in structure is that the distribution rotating body 6610 is used instead of the distribution rotating body 661. The guide member 651a provided in the variable winning device 650 is abolished, and the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can always reach the sorting rotor 6610. A part of the configuration of the ROM 202 provided is changed, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is changed, and a configuration executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The point that the partial processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is the point that it is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 63, the structure of the distribution rotor 6610 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the distribution rotator 6610 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 63 (b) is a front view of the distribution rotator 6610. As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the distribution rotator 6610 has a plurality of distribution units capable of distributing the sphere to either the positive variation entrance 671 or the normal entrance 672 or 673. Is provided. Specifically, the normal distribution unit 6610a that can distribute the ball to the normal entrance port 673, the normal distribution unit 6610b that can distribute the ball to the normal entrance port 672, and the probability variation entrance ball 671. Probability variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e that can be distributed to are provided. Similar to the normal distribution units 661a and 661b in the first embodiment, the normal distribution unit 6610a and the normal distribution unit 6610b communicate with each other. Further, similar to the probability variation distribution units 661c and 661d in the first embodiment, the probability variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e can guide the sphere to the back side of the distribution rotation body 6610. That is, it is possible to make the ball enter from the rear flow path 654 to the probability variation ball inlet 671.

  The distribution rotor 6610 according to the present embodiment is set with an operation pattern of a rotation operation that repeats the rotation operation for one distribution unit and the stop operation for a predetermined period (2 seconds) in 15 rounds of the big hit. It This operation pattern continues until the end of 15 rounds. That is, the operation continues until the opening operation (opening pattern) of the second specific winning opening 650a predetermined for each jackpot type is completed. In addition, although the details will be described later, the opening pattern in the present embodiment is an opening pattern in which the second specific winning port 650a is opened during a stop period (first period) after the rotation operation for one sorting unit. , The opening pattern in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the stop period (second period) after the rotation operation for one distribution unit is performed twice, and the rotation operation for one distribution unit is 3 times. An opening pattern is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the stop period (third period) after the game is repeated (see FIG. 66).

  By using the distribution rotator 6610, it is possible to focus attention on the distribution part into which the balls enter, so that it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being a work for obtaining a prize ball, and to enjoy the game during the jackpot. Can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, in the second embodiment, the guide member solenoid 209 for changing the guide member 651a is deleted as the guide member 651a is deleted.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b is referred to for determining the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, as in the first embodiment. Data table.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, four types of "big hit E" to "big hit H" are associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is stipulated. Specifically, as a jackpot type that is selected when a jackpot is hit in the lottery for the special symbol 1, "big jackpot E" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 being "0 to 49", The "big jackpot F" is associated with the range of "50 to 74", and the "big jackpot G" is associated with the range of "75 to 99".

  As will be described later in detail, the “big hit E” is set with an opening pattern in which the second specific winning port 650a is in an open state during a stop period (first period) after rotating by one sorting unit. It is a jackpot type, and “jackpot F” is a state in which the second specific winning opening 650a is in an open state during a stop period (second period) after the sorting rotator 6610 has performed two rotation operations for one sorting unit. Is a jackpot type in which an opening pattern is set, and the “jackpot G” indicates that the second specific winning opening 650a is in the stop period (third period) after the rotation operation for one sorting unit is performed three times. It is an open pattern that opens.

  Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that becomes "big hit E" is 50 from "0 to 49", so it was a big hit in the lottery for the special symbol 1. In this case, the ratio of "big hit E" is 50% (50/100). In addition, since the counter value that is “big hit F” is 25 pieces of “50 to 74”, when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the ratio of “big hit F” is 25% (25/100). . Further, since the counter value that is "big hit G" is 25 pieces of "75 to 99", the proportion of "big hit G" is 25% (25/100) when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1. .

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2, "big hit H" is associated with all the values of the first hit type counter C2 "0 to 99". When this “big hit H” is reached, an opening pattern is set in which the second specific winning port 650a is in an open state during a stop period that is set after the sorting rotor 6610 rotates by one sorting unit. That is, the same opening pattern as "big hit E" is set.

  Details of the open pattern for each jackpot type will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes in the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a for each jackpot type (for each opening pattern). As shown in FIG. 66, when the "big hit E" is reached, the second specific winning port (second large opening) 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the 15th round. The second specific winning opening 650a in the present embodiment is closed when the total opening period is 2 seconds or when 10 balls have entered. Since up to 100 balls can be launched per minute (about 3 in 2 seconds), it is extremely difficult to enter 10 balls in 2 seconds. Therefore, in the 15th round of "big hit E", the second specific winning opening 650a will be closed 2 seconds after being opened.

  On the other hand, in the rotating operation of the distribution rotating body 6610 in this case, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, at the same time as the 15th round of the jackpot is started, the rotating operation is clockwise by 72 degrees (for one distribution unit). Is performed for 0.2 seconds, and then the operation of stopping for 1.8 seconds is performed. Therefore, the distribution unit that is adjacent in the counterclockwise direction to the distribution unit that is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the start of the jackpot can enter the ball in the 15th round. If the distribution unit that can enter the ball is the probability variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e, by shifting the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a, the special symbol transitions to the probability variation state after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the distribution unit that can enter the ball is one of the normal distribution units 6610a and 6610b, the normal state is set after the jackpot regardless of whether or not the ball can be entered. . Since 15 rounds are completed during the stop operation, the distribution rotor 6610 is completed without performing the subsequent operations. That is, the distribution rotator 6610 is at the rotation position in which the distribution unit 6610 is rotated clockwise by one distribution unit at the end of the “big hit E”. This arrangement is maintained until the next jackpot.

  Since “big hit E” is a type that is easy to win in a low probability state of a special symbol, at the start of the big hit, basically, one of the normal distribution units 6610a and 6610b is arranged directly under the normal flow path 652. Becomes When the normal distribution unit 6610b is the “big hit E” in the initial arrangement (the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”) immediately below the normal flow path 652, the normal distribution unit 6610a can enter the ball. , After the jackpot is over, it shifts to a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of a normal symbol). In this case, at the end of the big hit, the normal distribution unit 6610a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”).

  In addition, when the normal distribution unit 6610a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”) and becomes “big hit E”, it is provided next to the normal distribution unit 661a in 15 rounds. It is possible to enter the determined probability variation distribution unit 661e. Therefore, by entering the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to shift to the probability changing state after the big hit. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610e is located immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “02H”).

  As described above, when the “big hit H” is reached, the same opening pattern as that of the “big hit E” is set. Therefore, even in the case of “big hit H”, the ball can enter the ball in the arrangement in which the distribution unit rotates by one from the start of the large value. Since "big hit H" is a big hit type that is easy to win in the probability variation state, basically, the distribution rotor 6610 at the start of the big hit is arranged such that the probability variation distribution parts 6610c to 6610e are directly under the normal flow path 652. Therefore, the number of loops in the probability variation state thereafter changes according to the number of consecutive probability variation distribution parts.

  Specifically, if the probability variation distribution unit 6610e is directly below the normal flow path 652 at the start of the big hit, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610d in this big hit, and the probability variation distribution unit in the next big hit. Since it becomes possible to enter the 6610c, the probability change state for two times is given (loop twice more). On the other hand, if the probability variation distribution unit 6610d is immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the start of the big hit, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610c at this big hit, but at the next big hit, the normal distribution unit 6610b. Since it is possible to enter the ball, the probability change state ends once. Further, if the probability variation distribution unit 6610c is immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the start of the jackpot, it is possible to enter the normal distribution unit 6610b at this jackpot, so the probability variation state is not given and the normal state is achieved. And transition.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 66, when the "big hit F" is reached, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the 15th round, but is closed in 0.2 seconds. Since it is difficult to enter the ball within 0.2 seconds, the second specific winning port 650a is closed without entering the ball during the opening period of 0.2 seconds. The closed state is maintained for 2 seconds, and after 2 seconds, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened again. This open state is maintained for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (2 seconds-0.2 seconds). Since it is extremely difficult to enter 10 balls in 1.8 seconds, in most cases, the second specific winning port 650a is closed after being opened for 1.8 seconds, and the 15th round is completed.

  On the other hand, in the rotating operation of the distribution rotating body 6610 in this case, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, at the same time as the 15th round of the jackpot is started, the rotating operation is clockwise by 72 degrees (for one distribution unit). For 0.2 seconds and then for 1.8 seconds to stop, and then again rotate clockwise 72 degrees (for one distribution unit) for 0.2 seconds, and then perform 1 second again. ．Stop operation for 8 seconds. Since the period of this second stop operation coincides with the opening period of 1.8 seconds in the “big hit F”, in the “big hit F”, from the arrangement of the sorting rotor 6610 at the start of the big hit, the distribution unit 2 is used. The sphere can reach the distribution rotator 6610 in the arrangement in which the sphere is rotated by one (144 degrees). Since 15 rounds are completed during the stop operation of the distribution rotator 6610, the distribution rotator 6610 ends its operation without executing the subsequent operations. That is, the distribution rotator 6610 is at the rotation position in which it rotates clockwise by two distribution units at the end of the “big hit F”. This arrangement is maintained until the next jackpot.

  Like the "big hit E", the "big hit E" is a type that is easy to win in a low probability state of a special symbol, so at the start of the big hit, either the normal distribution unit 6610a or 6610b is basically the normal flow path 652. It will be in the state immediately below. When the normal distribution unit 6610b is the “big hit F” in the initial arrangement (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”) immediately below the normal flow path 652, it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610e. , By entering the second specific winning opening 650a, it shifts to the probability changing state after the jackpot. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610e is located immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “02H”).

  In addition, when the normal distribution unit 6610a is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”) and the “big hit F” occurs, the ball enters the probability variation distribution unit 6610d in 15 rounds. It will be possible. Therefore, by entering the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to shift to the probability changing state after the big hit. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H”).

  As shown in FIG. 66, when the “big hit G” is reached, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the 15th round, but is closed in 0.2 seconds. As described above, it is difficult to enter the ball within 0.2 seconds, so the second specific winning opening 650a is closed without entering the ball during the opening period of 0.2 seconds. . The closed state is maintained for 4 seconds, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened again after 4 seconds. This open state is maintained for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (2 seconds-0.2 seconds). Since it is extremely difficult to enter 10 balls in 1.8 seconds, in most cases, the second specific winning port 650a is closed after being opened for 1.8 seconds, and the 15th round is completed.

  On the other hand, in the rotation operation of the distribution rotor 6610 in this case, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, the rotation operation for 0.2 seconds and the stop operation for 1.8 seconds are alternately repeated, and the third rotation is performed. The third stop period set after the operation coincides with the opening period of the second specific winning port 650a in the "big hit G". Therefore, in the “big hit G”, the sphere can reach the sorting rotor 6610 by the arrangement in which the sorting rotor 6610 is rotated by three sorting portions (216 degrees) from the placement at the start of the jackpot. Since 15 rounds are completed during the stop operation of the distribution rotator 6610, the distribution rotator 6610 ends its operation without executing the subsequent operations. That is, the distribution rotator 6610 is at the rotation position rotated clockwise by three distribution units at the end of the “big hit F”. This arrangement is maintained until the next jackpot.

  Like "big hit E" and "big hit F", "big hit G" is a type that is easy to win in a low probability state of a special symbol, so at the start of the big hit, either of the normal distribution units 6610a and 6610b is basically available. The orb is normally placed immediately below the flow path 652. When the normal allocating unit 6610b is “big hit G” in the initial arrangement (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”) immediately below the normal flow path 652, the normal allocating unit 6610b is divided by three. Since it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610d, which is a part of the game, by entering the second specific winning opening 650a, the probability variation state is achieved after the jackpot is over. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610d is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H”).

  Further, when the normal distribution unit 6610a is arranged immediately below the normal flow channel 652 (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”), when the “big hit G” is reached, three normal distribution units 6610a are divided in 15 rounds. It is possible to enter the probability variation distribution unit 6610c, which is the distribution unit described above. Therefore, by entering the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to shift to the probability changing state after the big hit. In this case, the probability variation distribution unit 6610c is arranged immediately below the normal flow path 652 at the end of the big hit (arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “04H”).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the operation of the distribution rotator 6610 is constant, and a plurality of jackpot types having different opening patterns of the second specific winning opening 650a are provided, whereby the second specific winning opening is formed. The rotation amount (variable amount) of the distribution rotator 6610 until the ball can enter the 650a is made different. Whether or not it is possible to enter the probability variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e (whether or not it is advantageous to the player) changes depending on the timing at which the ball can enter, so the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. The game can be played by paying attention to the timing when it is played. Therefore, the interest of the player in the 15th round of the jackpot can be improved. In addition, in the second embodiment, the rotation amount (variable amount) of the distribution rotation 6600 until the end of 15 rounds is changed by changing the period in which the jackpot round is ended, and at the end of the jackpot. The distribution rotor 6610 is arranged differently. Accordingly, it is possible to identify whether or not the next big hit is likely to be in the probability changing state by the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 6610 at the end of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 at the end of the big hit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 65 (b), regarding the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type at the time of transition from the low probability state of the special symbol to the probability variation state of the special symbol (at the time of probability variation rush), and the number of continuous occurrences of the probability variation state explain. FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of continuous probable states in accordance with the big hit type and the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 in the case of the big hit type. As described above, in the probability variation state, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is basically performed, so that the "big hit H" is determined when the big hit occurs. That is, in the probability variation state, the sorting unit rotates one by one each time the jackpot is hit. Therefore, how many times the probability variation state is continuously set is different depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 at the end point of the jackpot that first enters the probability variation entrance 671.

  As shown in FIG. 65B, when the “big hit E” occurs in the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 6610a is directly below the normal flow path 652), the “big hit E” occurs. Including the given probable state, the probable state is entered three times in succession. That is, over the three big hits ("big hit E", and twice "big hit H"), a special variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit. Since the probability variation state continues three times, three big jackpots are made at short intervals, so that the "big hit E" triggers the transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the “big hit F” is generated in the arrangement (initial arrangement) corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”, the probability variation state given after the “big hit F” is included three consecutive times. Then, the state changes to the probability change state. That is, over the three big hits (the “big hit F” this time, and the “big hit H” twice), a certain variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 at the time of “big hit F” is the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 6610a is directly below the normal flow path 652). Two consecutive transitions to the probable state. That is, the number of continuous probability variation states is smaller than that in the case of "big hit F" in the initial arrangement.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the "big hit G" occurs in the arrangement (initial arrangement) corresponding to the arrangement data "00H", the probability variation state given after the "big hit G" is consecutively repeated twice. To shift to the probability change state. That is, a special variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit over two big hits (the “big hit G” this time, and the next “big hit H”). On the other hand, when the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 at the time of “big hit G” is the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” (the arrangement where the normal allocating unit 6610a is directly below the normal flow path 652). , The probability change state ends once.

  In summary, in the arrangement (initial arrangement) corresponding to the arrangement data “00H”, when the “big hit E” does not shift to the probability changing state after the big hit, and when the “big hit F” occurs, the probability changing state occurs three times after that. Continuously (loop 3 times), when the "big hit G" is reached, the probability variation state continues 2 times thereafter (loops 2 times). Therefore, in the initial arrangement, the "big hit F" is the most advantageous and the "big hit E" is the most disadvantageous.

  On the other hand, in the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H” (the arrangement in which the normal distribution unit 6610a is directly below the normal flow path 652), when the “big hit E” is reached, the probability variation state continues three times (three times). When the "big hit F" is reached, the probability variation state continues twice thereafter (loops twice), and when the "big hit G" is reached, the probability variation state is given only once. Therefore, in the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data "01H", the "big hit E" is the most advantageous to the player (the probability variation state is looped the most times). On the other hand, when the "big hit G" is reached, the number of loops becomes the smallest (the probability variation distribution units 6610d and 6610e are skipped, and only the probability variation state based on the ball entering the probability variation distribution unit 6610c is provided). It will be a disadvantage.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the number of continuous probability variation states (the number of loops) to be shifted thereafter is different based on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 and the jackpot type that is won in the low probability state. It is configured. As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of jackpot and the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the probability variation time selection table 222b2 in the second embodiment will be described. Like the probability variation selection table 202b in the first embodiment, the probability variation selection table 222b2 is a data table used for selecting the back surface type in the probability variation state of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, in the 15th round in the probability variation state, the “big hit H” that rotates by one distribution unit is selected. One of the above is placed. Therefore, the probability variation selection table 222b2 in the present embodiment defines the arrangements corresponding to the arrangement data “02H” to “04H”.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the distribution position of the distribution rotator 661 is "02H" (the probability variation distribution unit 6610e is directly below the normal flow path 652), and the current rear surface type is rear surface. In the case of C, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 164", the back surface D is associated with the range of "165 to 198", and the value of the effect counter 223g is " The rear surface E is associated with "199". When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface D is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 189", and the back surface E is associated with the range of "190 to 199". ing. When the current back surface type is the back surface E, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 9", and the back surface E is associated with the range of "10 to 199". ing. The arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data "02H" is a very advantageous arrangement in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is given even after the next big hit and the big hit two times after. Therefore, as compared with the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H” or “04H”, the rear surface type (the rear surface D or the rear surface E) having a higher expectation degree is easily set. Thereby, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified from the back surface type.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, the distribution position of the distribution rotator 661 corresponds to “03H” (where the probability variation distribution unit 6610d is directly below the normal flow path 652), and the current rear surface type. Is the back surface C, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of "0 to 169", and the back surface D is associated with the range of "170 to 199". When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of “0 to 4”, and the back surface D is associated with the range of “5 to 199”. ing. The arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “03H” is a relatively advantageous arrangement in which the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the next big hit. Therefore, as compared with the layout corresponding to the layout data “04H”, the back surface D having a higher expectation is set more easily. Thereby, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified from the back surface type.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the distribution position of the distribution rotator 661 is the position corresponding to “04H” (the position where the probability variation distribution unit 6610c is directly below the normal flow path 652) and the current rear surface type. Is the rear surface C, the rear surface C is associated with the value of the effect counter 223g in the range of "0 to 198", and the rear surface D is associated with the value "199" of the effect counter 223g. When the current back surface type is the back surface D, the back surface C is associated with the range of the effect counter 223g of “0 to 29”, and the back surface D is associated with the range of “30 to 199”. ing. The arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “04H” is the most unfavorable arrangement in the probability variation state because it becomes the normal state after the next big hit. Therefore, compared to the other arrangements, the rear surface C having a lower expectation is more likely to be formed. As a result, the back surface type and the actual expectation can be linked, and the player can be notified of the appropriate expectation.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 68 and 69. First, details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 68. The big hit operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 68) in the second embodiment is the same as the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. 65a, the operation of the second large opening 650a), and the operation of the distribution rotator 661. The same parts as those in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The big hit operation setting process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment is different only in that the process of S1107 of the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is deleted, and S1101 to S1106. In each process, the same process as each of S1101 to S1106 of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is executed. This is because the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment does not have the guide member 651a, and it is not necessary to execute the process of S1107 for setting the guide member 651a.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 69, the winning process 2 (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the winning process 2 (S1022). The winning process 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment is the same as the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, which is a large opening (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a). This is a process for performing control according to winning a prize. The same parts as those in the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  In each of S1301 to S1308 and S1310 to S1319 of the winning process 2 (S1022) in the second embodiment, S1301 to S1308 and S1310 to S1319 of the winning process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40), respectively. The same processing as each processing of is executed.

  Further, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1308 ends, the rotor motor 622a is stopped (S1321), and the process proceeds to S1310.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the distribution rotor having the section where the two normal distribution sections 6610a and 6610b are continuous and the section where the three positive variation distribution sections 6610c to 6610e are continuous. 6610 was adopted. Then, as the jackpot type, a type in which the distribution unit rotates by one distribution unit from the arrangement at the start of the jackpot and a ball can enter the distribution unit in the arrangement after the rotation operation (Emoji E, H) And a type (big hit F) in which the ball can enter the sorting part of the arrangement after the rotation operation while rotating by two distribution parts from the arrangement at the start of the big hit, and It is configured to rotate from the arrangement by three distribution units, and to provide three types of big hits including a type (big hit G) in which a ball can enter the distribution unit after the rotation operation. . Further, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot H) that rotates by one distribution unit is configured to be easily determined from the arrangement at the start of the jackpot. With such a configuration, in the normal state, the number of continuous probability variation states can be changed to 1 to 3 times depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610 when the ball first enters the probability variation distribution unit. Can be made. That is, it is possible to change the number of consecutive probability-change states thereafter according to the type of jackpot when entering the probability-change state. Therefore, in the normal state, the advantageous jackpot type and the disadvantageous jackpot type can be made different according to the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610. That is, in 1 arrangement, the probability variation state is difficult to continue, but in different arrangements, the probability variation state tends to be continuous. It is difficult to enter the probability variation state with 1 arrangement, but it is difficult to enter the probability variation state in different arrangements. It is possible to provide a jackpot type or the like, which is possible and whose probability change state is likely to continue thereafter. Therefore, different jackpot types can be expected depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6610, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Note that, in the second embodiment, in the probability changing state, only the “big hit H” that rotates by one distribution unit is easily determined from the arrangement at the time of starting the big hit, but it is also configured in the probability changing state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a jackpot type that rotates by two or three distribution units is determined. This makes it possible to expect different jackpot types depending on the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 even in the probability changing state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the second embodiment, only the jackpot type having 15 rounds of jackpots is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of rounds may be varied. For example, the number of rounds of jackpot E may be 2, the number of rounds of jackpot F may be 8, the number of rounds of jackpot G may be 15, and the number of rounds of jackpot H may be 15. In addition, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 2, a jackpot I of two rounds and a jackpot J of eight rounds are provided, and jackpots H to J are Alternatively, the rotation operation set for the distribution rotor 6610 may be common. Further, in this case, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured such that an opening pattern is set in the first round or the second round. With this configuration, the number of prize balls can be sharpened, so that the degree of advantage and the degree of disadvantage can be further diversified. In other words, in the arrangement corresponding to the arrangement data “01H”, the big hit E results in three consecutive successive probable states, which is advantageous as the number of consecutive probable states, but is most unfavorable for a prize spherical surface. . Therefore, even if the probability variation state becomes small, a player expecting a jackpot type (jackpot F, G) with a larger number of prize balls, or a jackpot E, the maximum number (3 times) of the probability variation state is given. Depending on the taste of the player, such as the player who is expected to be played, it is possible to make different types of happy jackpots. In addition, as a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 2, by providing big hits H to J, while maintaining the number of consecutive continuous in the probable variation state specified from the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 when entering the probable variation state. Therefore, the number of prize balls can be varied. Therefore, once the player suddenly enters the probability change state, it is possible to play the game in the expectation that it will be a jackpot type having a larger number of prize balls. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game after entering the probability change state from being just like the work of winning a specified number of jackpots. In each jackpot, the number of rounds (the number of prize balls that can be acquired) is a jackpot. The type can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the probability changing state becomes monotonous.

  In the second embodiment, five distribution units (normal distribution units 6610a and 6610b, and positive variation distribution units 6610c to 6610e) are provided for the distribution rotation body 6610, but the normal distribution unit and the positive variation units are provided. The ratio to the distribution unit and the total number of distribution units are not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily. Further, the distribution rotator 6610 is not limited to a circular shape, and may have an arbitrary shape such as a triangle or a quadrangle. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In the second embodiment, the rotation operation of the distribution rotor 6610 is changed according to the jackpot type, and the arrangement of the distribution rotor 6610 at the end of the jackpot is held until the next jackpot. Although the degree of advantage changes depending on the combination of the arrangement of the minute rotation body 6610 and the type of jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of using the second variable winning device 650, it may be configured to be controllably realized by a process when selecting a jackpot type. More specifically, for example, as a jackpot type, a definite variation jackpot that transitions to a definite variation state of a special symbol after a jackpot and a normal jackpot that transitions to a normal state after a jackpot are provided, and the jackpot history of the main control device 110 is set. The configuration is stored in the RAM 203. Then, when the probability variation jackpot is obtained by the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the number of consecutive probability variation jackpots is set within the range of 1 to 3 times in accordance with the history of the jackpots stored in the RAM 203. It may be configured. That is, as the history until the probability variation big hit, it may be controlled so that the larger the number of times of continuous success of the normal big hit, the easier it is to set a large number of times of success. With such a configuration, even if the normal jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player continues, it can be expected that more probability variation states continue after that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from decreasing even when the jackpot is usually won.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in 1 to 14 rounds of the jackpot, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in 15 rounds. However, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. The round may be set arbitrarily. For example, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in the first round of jackpot. With such a configuration, the player can more quickly know whether or not to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol after the big hit. Therefore, when the ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 671 in the first round, the subsequent games of the 2nd to 15th rounds can be played at ease.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the first ball entrance 64 may be provided. Then, depending on whether or not the special symbol is in the probability changing state, the operation pattern of the rotation operation set for the distribution rotor 661 or the distribution rotor 6610 may be different. With this configuration, the number of second entrance ports 640 can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other embodiment to configure a gaming machine.

  In each of the above embodiments, the normal symbol hit state in the normal state of the normal symbol (at low probability) was set to 1/10 (24/240), but the hit probability is not limited to this, and a lower probability. (For example, 1/240) may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal symbol to hit the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes more difficult to be executed. Therefore, trying to execute the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method in which the ball is aimed at the right side of the game board 13 (always right hitting) even in the normal state of the normal symbol. it can. In addition, as a method for suppressing an irregular game method, for example, a configuration in which a lottery for normal symbols is not suspended may be adopted. With such a configuration, even if the player always makes a right hit, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes long (30 seconds), so it is normal only once in 30 seconds. In addition to not being able to execute the lottery of symbols, all passing through the through gate 67 during the change of symbols is a useless ball. Therefore, when the right hitting is performed in the normal state of the normal symbol, the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be more difficult to be executed, so that the irregular game method of always performing the right hitting is more surely suppressed (prevented). You can Further, as a method for suppressing the irregular game method, for example, the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol may be made longer (for example, 10 minutes). With this configuration, the lottery interval of the ordinary symbols in the normal state of the ordinary symbols can be made longer, so that the lottery of the ordinary symbols becomes difficult to be performed, and the second symbol enters the second entrance 640. Can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method of always performing right hitting.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and the stop is displayed. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction of the game machine installation location due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (V winning rate is changed according to the history of operation of V character)
A ball-entering means into which the game ball can enter, a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball-entering means, and the discriminating means results in a specific discrimination. On the basis of the above, in the gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player and a variable ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter during execution of the privilege game, The first ball entry area, which is arranged inside the ball means and is capable of entering the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, the second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area, and the first On the basis of the fact that the game ball has entered the ball-entering area, the special-purpose awarding means for giving a specific privilege and the determination result by the determination means result in the game for the first ball-entering area. By the entry rate setting means for setting the entry rate of the ball and the entry rate setting means The gaming machine to the ball entrance rate set, characterized in that it comprises a ball entrance rate determination means for determining based at least on the entering sphere rate setting last entry spheres rate set by the means A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a winning is performed by a lottery executed based on a starting ball, a specific winning opening is provided in which the ball is set in an open state where In some cases, a privilege is given when a ball enters the winning opening. In addition, in some of the conventional game machines, a specific winning area is provided inside the specific winning opening to which a probability varying state is given when the ball enters. In addition, the ease of entering a specific entry area is made different according to the type of hit (for example, JP 2012-245172 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the easiness of entering a specific entry area is fixed according to the hit type, when the hit type is known, the state shifts to a probability variation state. In some cases, the degree of expectation may be known, and it may be difficult to maintain the degree of expectation for the probability fluctuation state.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the variable ball entering means is provided with a first ball entering area and a second ball entering area different from the first ball entering area. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance area, the privilege granting means grants a specific privilege. Based on the result of the determination made by the determination means being a specific result, the entry rate of the game ball to the first entry area is set by the entry rate setting means. Here, the entry rate set by the entry means is determined by the entry rate determining means based at least on the previous entry rate set by the entry rate setting means.

  As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed in accordance with the previously set entry rate, which makes it difficult for the player to predict the entry rate. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not a specific privilege will be granted, and thus it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the specific privilege for a longer period of time.

  In the gaming machine A1, it is possible to change between a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are distributed into the first entrance area and a second allocation state in which the game balls are distributed into the second entrance area. The distribution rate determining means includes a distribution means, and determines the distribution pattern of the distribution means as one distribution pattern from a plurality of distribution patterns having different distribution rates for the first distribution area. The game machine A2, wherein the filled-in-ball-rate setting means controls the distribution means to be variable according to the distribution pattern determined by the entering-ball-rate determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1. That is, the variable distribution means is provided between the first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are allocated to the first entrance area and the second allocation state in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area. ing. As the distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined by the distribution rate determining means from among a plurality of distribution patterns having different distribution rates for the first distribution area, and the distribution determined by the distribution rate determining means. It is controlled by the entry rate setting means so that the distribution means can be changed depending on the pattern.

  As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed according to the distribution pattern set in the distribution means, so that the distribution pattern to be set can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  The gaming machine A3 is provided with a holding means for holding the incoming ball rate set by the incoming ball rate setting means in the gaming machine A1 or A2 at least until the determination result is the specific determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the holding rate is held by the holding means until the entering rate set by the entering rate setting means reaches a specific determination result at least next time by the determining means. Therefore, when determining a new ball entry rate by the ball entry rate determining means, it is sufficient to refer to the ball entry rate held by the holding means, and to reduce the processing load when determining the ball entry rate. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine A2, the state of the sorting means at the time when the control based on the sorting pattern set by the entry rate setting means is finished is held until at least the next determination result is the specific determination result. A gaming machine A4 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the state of the sorting means at the time when the control based on the sorting pattern set by the entry rate setting means is completed is at least next determined by the determination means. Since the holding means holds the result until the result is reached, when the distribution pattern is set by the entry rate setting means, it is only necessary to start the distribution pattern from the state at the start of the big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when setting the distribution pattern can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A4, the distribution means switches between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in accordance with a predetermined order while being controlled to be varied by the ball entry rate setting means. Yes, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the plurality of sorting patterns are configured so that the variable amounts of the sorting means are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A4, the following effects are produced. That is, the distribution means is configured to switch between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in accordance with a predetermined order while being controlled to be variable by the entry rate setting means. The plurality of distribution patterns are configured so that the variable amounts of the distribution means are different from each other.

  As a result, the rate of entry into the first entry area varies depending on the variable amount of the distribution means, so that the operation of the distribution means can be focused on during the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the privilege game from becoming a monotonous game in which the game ball is only aimed at the variable ball entering means.

  In the gaming machine A5, the sorting means is composed of a rotating body having one or a plurality of the first ball entry areas and one or a plurality of the second ball entry areas, and the first entry is made according to a rotational position. A gaming machine A6, characterized in that the game balls have different entrance rates to the ball area.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5. That is, the distribution means is composed of a rotating body provided with one or a plurality of first ball entry areas and one or a plurality of second ball entry areas. In such a rotating body, the ball-entering rate of the game ball with respect to the first ball-entering area differs depending on the rotational position.

  As a result, the bonus game can be played while paying attention to the rotational position of the rotating body during execution of the bonus game, so that the bonus game is a monotonous game in which the game ball is only aimed at the variable ball entrance means. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the privilege granting means grants, as the specific privilege, a second game state that is more likely to result in the specific determination result by the determining means than in the first game state in which the specific privilege is not granted. The distribution means has a section in which a plurality of the first ball entry areas are continuously arranged along the rotation direction, and the ball entry rate determination means determines the identification in the second gaming state. When the result of the determination is No, it is easier to determine the distribution pattern in which the variable amount of the distribution means corresponds to one entry area in comparison with the first game state. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6. That is, as compared with the first game state in which the specific privilege is not provided, the second game state in which the determination unit is likely to have the specific determination result is provided by the privilege providing unit as the specific privilege. The distribution means is provided with a section in which the plurality of first ball entry areas are continuously arranged along the rotation direction. When the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the distribution pattern in which the variable amount of the distribution means corresponds to one entry area is easily determined by the entry rate determination means as compared with the first game state. Become.

  As a result, when the second game state is entered in the section where the first ball entry area is continuously arranged, it becomes easy to continuously enter the first ball entry area in the subsequent privilege game. . Therefore, the second game state, which is advantageous to the player, can be easily continued, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the privilege granting means sets the second game state in which the specific determination result is likely to be the specific benefit by the determining means in comparison with the first game state in which the specific benefit is not granted. The entry rate determining means is, as compared with the second gaming state, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the rotational position at the start of variation and the variable end A gaming machine A8, which facilitates determination of the distribution pattern in which the rotational position at time coincides.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the following effects are produced. That is, as compared with the first game state in which the specific privilege is not provided, the second game state in which the determination unit is likely to have the specific determination result is provided by the privilege providing unit as the specific privilege. Compared to the second game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first game state, a distribution pattern in which the rotational position at the time of variable start and the rotational position at the time of variable end match is determined by the ball entry rate determining means. It will be easier to decide.

  As a result, in the first gaming state, even if a specific determination result is obtained, it becomes difficult to enter the second gaming state. That is, since the first game state is likely to be continuous, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to be too high.

<Characteristic group B> (Advantageous winning type is changed according to the state)
Based on the determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the specific determination result by the determination means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game As the privilege game executed by the executing unit, based on the type determination unit capable of selecting one type of the privilege game from a plurality of types determined in advance and the specific determination result by the determination unit, The state setting means for setting one state out of a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player, the type of the privilege game selected by the type selection means, and the state before the privilege game is executed. A game machine B1 provided with a state determination means for determining the state set by the state setting means at least.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the start winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. Among such conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that is provided with a time saving state or a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player after winning, as a privilege for winning. Further, among the conventional gaming machines, there is one in which the period of the time saving state to be given is different according to the gaming state even if the hit type is the same (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-130998).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that variations in the added value added are scarce.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the determination means makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination means gives a specific determination result, so that a bonus game advantageous to the player is given. It is executed by the privilege game executing means. As the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type of privilege game is selected from the plurality of types determined in advance by the type selecting means. Further, the state setting means sets one state out of a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player based on the specific determination result by the determination means. The state set by the state setting means is determined by the state determining means based on at least the type of privilege game selected by the type selecting means and the state before the privilege game is executed.

  Thereby, the state after the execution of the privilege game can be determined according to the state before the privilege game is executed, so that the game state set after the privilege game can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, the state determination means has a first state in which the determination result by the determination means is unlikely to be the specific determination result and a second state in which the specific determination result is more likely to be compared to the first state. At least a determinable game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the first state in which the discrimination result by the discriminating means is unlikely to be the specific discrimination result, and the second state in which the specific discrimination result is more likely to be compared to the first state Since and are configured to be at least determinable by the state determining means, the second state facilitates the privilege game to be executed again within a short period after the end of the previous privilege game. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to be in the second state, so that the player can play the game while expecting the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B2, the state determining means compares the first state with the second state as the state after the privilege game is finished when the privilege game is executed in the second state. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being easy to determine.

  According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the following effect is achieved. That is, as compared with the first state, when the privilege game is executed in the second state, the second state is more easily determined by the state determining means as a state after the privilege game is finished, Once in the second state, it becomes easy for the state determining means to continuously determine the second state a plurality of times. That is, the bonus game and the second state are easily repeated, so that the game can be played in the expectation of the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a game ball that can enter a game ball during execution of the privilege game and a variable ball means arranged inside the variable ball means, and the game ball that entered the variable ball means, First distribution area that can enter a ball, a second ball area different from the first ball area, and a game ball that has entered the variable ball means to the first ball area. As a distribution pattern that can be varied between a state and a second distribution state that is distributed to the second entry area, and a distribution pattern that determines one distribution pattern from among a plurality of distribution patterns that are determined in advance as the distribution pattern of the distribution means. The distribution pattern includes a determination means and a distribution control means for controlling the distribution pattern to be variable according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means. Compared to the first state, the determining means makes it easier to set a distribution pattern in which the game ball is likely to enter the first entry area when the privilege game is executed in the second state. The game machine B4 is characterized in that the state determining means sets the second state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entry area.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are provided inside the variable ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the privilege game. The distribution means is variable between a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are allocated to the first entrance area and a second allocation state in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area. As the distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined by the distribution pattern determination means from among a plurality of predetermined distribution patterns. According to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means, the distribution control means controls the distribution means to be variable. Compared to the first state, when the privilege game is executed in the second state, the distribution pattern setting means easily sets the distribution pattern in which the game balls are likely to enter the first entry area. The second state is set by the state determining means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry area.

  As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed according to the distribution pattern set in the distribution means, so that the distribution pattern to be set can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the distribution means switches between the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a predetermined order while being controlled by the distribution control means so as to vary. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the sorting patterns are configured such that the varying amounts of the sorting means are different from each other.

  According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the distribution unit is configured so as to switch between the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a predetermined order while being controlled to be variable by the distribution control unit. The plurality of distribution patterns are configured so that the variable amounts of the distribution means are different from each other.

  As a result, since the game can be played while the bonus game is being executed by paying attention to the variable amount of the distribution means, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the sorting means is composed of a rotating body having one or a plurality of the first ball entry areas and one or a plurality of the second ball entry areas, and the first entry is made according to a rotational position. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that the entering rate of the game ball to the ball region is different.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the distribution means is composed of a rotating body having one or a plurality of first ball entry areas and one or a plurality of second ball entry areas. . The rotating body is configured so that the probability of entering the game ball into the first entering area differs depending on the rotational position. As a result, the bonus game can be played while paying attention to the rotational position of the rotating body during execution of the bonus game, so that the bonus game is a monotonous game in which the game ball is only aimed at the variable ball entrance means. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B6, the distribution means has a section in which a plurality of the first entry areas are continuously arranged along the rotation direction, and the distribution pattern determination means determines the specific determination in the second state. When the result is obtained, it becomes easier to determine the distribution pattern in which the variable amount of the distribution means corresponds to one entry area, as compared with the first state. .

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are produced. That is, the distribution unit is provided with a section in which the plurality of first ball entry areas are continuously arranged along the rotation direction. When the specific determination result is obtained in the second state, the distribution pattern determining unit can more easily determine the distribution pattern in which the variable amount of the distribution unit corresponds to one entry area, as compared with the first state.

  As a result, when the second state is achieved in the section in which the first entry areas are continuously arranged, it becomes easier to enter the first entry area continuously in the subsequent bonus game. Therefore, the second game state, which is advantageous to the player, can be easily continued, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distribution pattern determination means, when compared with the second state, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first state, the rotational position at the start of variable and the rotation at the time of variable end. A gaming machine B8, which facilitates setting of the distribution pattern whose position matches.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6 or B7, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first state as compared with the second state, the rotational position at the time of the variable start and the variable position at the time of the variable end. Since it becomes easy for the distribution pattern determination means to determine a distribution pattern that matches the rotation position of the above, in the first state, even if a specific determination result is obtained, it is difficult to obtain the second state. That is, since the first state is likely to continue, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to be too high.

<Characteristic C group> (Variable number of probability variation loops according to jackpot type at probability variation entry)
Discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player on the basis of the specific discrimination result by the discriminating means and the privilege game execution thereof. As the privilege game executed by the means, a type selecting means for selecting one type from a plurality of types of the privilege games set in advance and a game state after the execution of the privilege game is finished, a first game state, , A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state advantageous to the player as compared with the first game state, and when the privilege game is executed, based on the type of the privilege game executed. In the setting by the game state setting means executed thereafter, the first state in which the second game state is continuously set over the first number of times of the privilege game, and the first number of times Many Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it comprises at least settable state setting means and a second state in which the two consecutive times the second game condition is set.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the start winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. Among such conventional type gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that is provided with a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player after winning, as a privilege for winning. In the probability variation state, the lottery probability of winning is higher than usual, so that the winning is likely to continue for a short period. Therefore, by making the player expect that the winning and the probability change state are repeated, the player's interest is improved. Further, some gaming machines equipped with a probability variation state limit the number of consecutive probability variation states (perform probability variation limit control) to suppress gambling (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014). -036729).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the number of consecutive times that the probability variation limit control is performed is fixed, there is a case where it can be known from the number of times the probability variation state continues that the probability variation state ends at the next hit. However, there is a possibility that the interest of the player in the game cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the determination means executes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the special determination result is obtained by the determination means, so that a bonus game advantageous to the player is provided. It is executed by the privilege game executing means. As the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type is selected by the type selecting means from a plurality of predetermined types of privilege games. As the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, the first game state and the second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the first game state are set by the game state setting means. When the privilege game is executed, based on the type of the privilege game executed, the second state is continuously set for the first number of privilege games by the setting by the game state setting means executed thereafter. The state setting means can set the first state in which the state is set and the second state in which the second game state is set continuously for the second number of times larger than the first number.

  As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how continuous the second game state is. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the second game state is set in each privilege game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the state setting means sets a third state in which the first game state is easily set in comparison with the second game state by the game state setting means based on the type of the privilege game executed. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being settable.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, based on the type of privilege game executed, the first gaming state is easily set by the gaming state setting means as compared with the second gaming state. Since the state is set by the state setting means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous because only the first state or the second state is set.

  When the first state or the second state is set in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the number of times corresponding to the set state is set until the second game state is continuously set. A gaming machine C3, characterized by comprising avoiding means for avoiding the setting of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the first state or the second state is set, the number of times of the second gaming state corresponding to the set state is increased. Since the setting of the first game state is avoided by the avoiding means until it is continuously set, when the first state or the second state is set, a corresponding number of times of the second game state The effect is that it can be set reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a variable ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter during execution of the privilege game and a variable ball entering means arranged inside the variable ball entering means and entering the variable ball entering means. A first ball entering area into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering area different from the first ball entering area, and a game ball entering the variable ball entering means are distributed to the first ball entering area. As a distribution means which can be varied between a first distribution state and a second distribution state in which the second distribution area is distributed and a distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined from a plurality of predetermined distribution patterns. And a distribution control means for controlling the distribution pattern to be variable according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means. The pattern determining means determines a distribution pattern in which a game ball easily enters the first ball entry area when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, as compared to the first game state. The game state setting means is for setting the second game state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entry area, the gaming machine C4. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following advantages are produced. That is, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are arranged inside the variable ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the bonus game. The distribution means is variable between a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are allocated to the first entrance area and a second allocation state in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area. As a distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined from the plurality of predetermined distribution patterns by the distribution pattern determination means, and the distribution means is varied according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means. It is controlled by the control means. Compared to the first game state, when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, the distribution pattern determining means is more likely to determine the distribution pattern in which the game balls are likely to enter the first ball entry area. The second game state is set by the game state setting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry area.

  As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed according to the distribution pattern set in the distribution means, so that the distribution pattern to be set can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the distribution means switches between the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a predetermined order while being controlled by the distribution control means to be variable. The gaming machine C5, wherein the sorting patterns are configured such that the varying amounts of the sorting means are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the distribution unit is configured to switch between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in accordance with a predetermined order while being controlled to be variable by the distribution control unit. The plurality of distribution patterns are configured so that the variable amounts of the distribution means are different from each other.

  With this, during the execution of the privilege game, the variable amount of the sorting means can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the privilege game from becoming a monotonous game in which the game ball is only aimed at the variable ball entering means.

  In the gaming machine C5, the distribution means has a section in which the first distribution state is continuous by being variable, and a section in which the second distribution state is continuous, and is the most of the plurality of distribution patterns. The gaming machine C6, wherein the sorting pattern with a small variable amount of the sorting means is a variable amount in which the state of the sorting means is switched once.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5. That is, the distribution means is provided with a section in which the first distribution state is continuous and a section in which the second distribution state is continuous by being variable. Among the plurality of distribution patterns, the distribution pattern with the smallest variable amount of the distributing means is composed of the variable amount that the state of the distributing means is switched once.

  Accordingly, once the game balls can be entered into the first entry area in the first distribution state, the first distribution state can be easily set continuously. That is, it becomes easy to continuously set the second game state. Therefore, the merit of entering the second game state can be further increased, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C6, the distribution pattern determination means makes it easier to determine the distribution pattern having a large variable amount when the privilege game is executed in the first game state, as compared with the second game state. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, when the privilege game is executed in the first gaming state as compared with the second gaming state, the sorting pattern having a large variable amount is the sorting pattern determining means. Since it is easy to be determined by, in the first game state, it becomes easy to exit the section in which the second distribution state is continuous with a small number of executions of the privilege game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, from continuing for a long time, and thus it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from decreasing.

  In the gaming machine C7, the state setting means makes it easier to set the first state as the variable amount of the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means increases.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the larger the variable amount of the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means, the easier the first state is set by the state setting means. When a distribution pattern with a large variable amount is set in the state, the second distribution state is likely to occur, while the number of consecutive second game states decreases even when the second game state is entered. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessive advantage for the player.

  The gaming machine Z1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an advantageous winning state is given to the player when the lottery result executed based on the starting winning is a win. Among such conventional type gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that is provided with a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player after winning, as a privilege for winning. As a privilege to be won, there is a bonus that is given to the player after the win. In the probability variation state, the lottery probability of winning is higher than usual, so that the winning is likely to continue for a short period. Therefore, by making the player expect that the winning and the probability change state are repeated, the interest of the player is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-320110).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the probability variation state set after the hit is only once, and it is unclear whether the probability variation state is set after the hit. Therefore, it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player in playing the game.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a player based on a specific discrimination result by the discriminating means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to, and a type selecting means for selecting one type from a plurality of predetermined types of the privilege game as the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, As a game state after the execution of the privilege game is finished, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the first game state, and When the privilege game is executed, based on the type of the privilege game executed, the setting is performed by the game state setting means to be executed thereafter, and the game is continuously performed for the first number of times of the privilege game. Second It is provided with a state setting means capable of setting at least a first state in which a game state is set and a second state in which the second game state is continuously set a second number of times larger than the first number of times. .
The game machine according to the technical idea 2 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the state setting means compares the game state setting means with the second game state based on the type of the privilege game executed. Then, the third state in which the first game state is easily set can be set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, in the case where the first state or the second state is set, the number of times corresponding to the set state. Until the second game state is continuously set, the avoidance means for avoiding setting the first game state is provided.
The game machine of the technical idea 4 is the game machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, in which a game ball can be entered while the privilege game is being executed, and the variable ball entry. A first ball entry area, which is arranged inside the means, in which the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means can enter, a second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area, and the variable ball entry Distributing means that can be varied between a first distributing state in which game balls that have entered the ball means are distributed to the first entering area and a second distribution state that is distributed to the second entering area, and the distribution of the distributing means As a pattern, a distribution pattern determining unit that determines one distribution pattern from a plurality of predetermined distribution patterns, and the distribution unit varies according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determining unit. Distribution control means for controlling as described above, the distribution pattern determination means, in comparison with the first game state, when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, to the first entry area It is easy to determine a distribution pattern in which the game ball is easy to enter, and the game state setting means sets the second game state based on the fact that the game ball enters the first entry area. It is something to set.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination means executes the predetermined determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination means provides the specific determination result, which is advantageous for the player. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. As the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type is selected by the type selecting means from a plurality of predetermined types of privilege games. As the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, the first game state and the second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the first game state are set by the game state setting means. When the privilege game is executed, based on the type of the privilege game executed, the second state is continuously set for the first number of privilege games by the setting by the game state setting means executed thereafter. The state setting means can set the first state in which the state is set and the second state in which the second game state is set continuously for the second number of times larger than the first number.
As a result, it is possible to expect the second game state a plurality of times by changing to the first state or the second state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, based on the type of the privilege game executed, the gaming state setting means compares the gaming state with the second gaming state. Since the third state in which the first game state is easily set is set by the state setting means, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous because only the first state or the second state is set. There is an effect.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, when the first state or the second state is set, the setting is set. The first state or the second state is set because the avoidance means avoids setting the first game state until the second number of times corresponding to the state is continuously set. In this case, there is an effect that the corresponding number of times of the second gaming state can be surely set.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are arranged inside the variable ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the bonus game. The distribution means is variable between a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are allocated to the first entrance area and a second allocation state in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area. As a distribution pattern of the distribution means, one distribution pattern is determined from the plurality of predetermined distribution patterns by the distribution pattern determination means, and the distribution means is varied according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means. It is controlled by the control means. Compared to the first game state, when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, the distribution pattern determining means is more likely to determine the distribution pattern in which the game balls are likely to enter the first ball entry area. The second game state is set by the game state setting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry area.
As a result, the entry rate for the first entry area can be changed according to the distribution pattern set in the distribution means, so that the distribution pattern to be set can be focused. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
64 1st entrance (part of entrance means)
640 2nd entrance (part of entrance means)
650 Second variable winning device (variable winning means)
66 1 distribution rotor ( variable means)
66 1 a, 66 1 b Normal distribution part (part of the second ball entry area)
66 1 c, 66 1d Probability variation distribution part (part of the first ball entry area)
671 Positive change entrance (part of the first entrance area)
672, 673 Normal entrance (part of the second entrance area)
S219 variable game execution means S305 discrimination means
S306 Type determination means
S1104 second variable control means S1105 switching pattern determining means S1106 first variable control means S1203 privilege granting means, gaming state setting hand stage

Claims (4)

Determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the determination condition,
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination made by the determining means,
As the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing unit, a type selecting unit that selects one type from a plurality of types of the privilege game set in advance,
As a game state after the execution of the privilege game is finished, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state advantageous to the player as compared with the first game state,
When the privilege game is executed, based on the type of the privilege game executed, the setting by the game state setting means to be executed thereafter is continuously performed over the first number of the privilege games. State setting means capable of setting at least a first state in which the second game state is set and a second state in which the second game state is set continuously for a second number of times larger than the first number of times A gaming machine comprising:   The state setting means can set a third state in which the first game state is easily set by the game state setting means in comparison with the second game state, based on the type of the privilege game executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein   When the first state or the second state is set, the first game state is set until the number of times of the second game state corresponding to the set state is continuously set. The amusement machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising an avoiding means for avoiding being performed. A variable ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter during execution of the privilege game,
A first ball entry area, which is arranged inside the variable ball entry means, and into which the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means can enter, and a second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area. ,
A distribution means that is variable between a first distribution state in which the game balls entered into the variable entrance means are distributed into the first entrance area and a second distribution state in which the game balls are allocated to the second entrance area,
As a distribution pattern of the distribution means, a distribution pattern determination means for determining one distribution pattern from a plurality of predetermined distribution patterns,
Distribution control means for controlling the distribution means to vary according to the distribution pattern determined by the distribution pattern determination means,
The distribution pattern determination means is, in comparison with the first game state, when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, a distribution pattern in which a game ball easily enters the first ball entering area. Is easier to determine,
4. The game state setting means sets the second game state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering area. The game machine described.

Images